PCL-II LinePrinter Plus

Add to my manuals
312 Pages

advertisement

PCL-II LinePrinter Plus | Manualzz

PCL

®

-II/LinePrinter Plus

®

Technical Reference Manual

/LQH-HW

Printers

LineJet™ Printers

PCL

®

-II/LinePrinter Plus

®

Technical Reference Manual

Hewlett-Packard makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this material, including, but not limited to, implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Hewlett-Packard shall not be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any damages, whether direct, indirect, incidental or consequential, in connection with the furnishing, distribution, performance or use of this material. The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright. No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, translated or incorporated in any other material in any form or by any means, whether manual, graphic, electronic, mechanical or otherwise, without the prior written consent of

Hewlett-Packard.

COPYRIGHT

2000, HEWLETT-PACKARD CO.

All rights reserved.

Trademark Acknowledgements

IBM and Proprinter are registered trademarks, and PC-DOS is a trademark of

International Business Machines Corporation.

Centronics is a registered trademark of Genicom Corporation.

E NERGY S TAR is a registered trademark of the United States

Environmental Protection Agency. As an E NERGY S TAR

Packard has determined that this product meets the E

®

Partner, Hewlett-

NERGY S TAR

® guidelines for energy efficiency.

Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.

Hewlett-Packard, HP and PCL are registered trademarks, and LineJet is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.

IGP, PGL, LinePrinter Plus, and Printronix are registered trademarks of

Printronix, Inc.

Magnum and QMS are registered trademarks, and Code V is a trademark of

Quality Micro Systems, Inc.

Microsoft, MS, Windows and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation.

PKZIP is a registered trademark of PKWARE, Inc.

Postnet is a registered trademark of the United States Postal Service.

This product uses Intellifont Scalable typefaces and Intellifont technology.

Intellifont is a registered trademark of Agfa Division, Miles Incorporated

(Agfa).

CG, Garth Graphic, Intellifont, and Type Director are registered trademarks, and Shannon and CG Triumvirate are trademarks of Agfa Division, Miles

Incorporated (Agfa). CG Bodoni, CG Century Schoolbook, CG Goudy Old

Style, CG Melliza, Microstyle, CG Omega, and CG Palacio are products of

Agfa Corporation. CG Times, based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation Plc is a product of Agfa.

Univers is a registered trademark of Linotype AG and/or its subsidiaries.

Letraset is a registered trademark, and Aachen, Revue and University Roman are trademarks of Esselte Pendaflex Corporation.

Futura is a registered trademark of Fundición Tipográfica Neufville, S.A.

ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Benguiat, ITC Bookman, ITC Century, ITC

Cheltenham, ITC Clearface, ITC Galliard, ITC Korinna, ITC Lubalin Graph,

ITC Souvenir, ITC Tiepolo, ITC Zapf Chancery, and ITC Zapf Dingbats are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation.

Albertus, Gill Sans, and Times New Roman are registered trademarks, and

Monotype Baskerville is a trademark of The Monotype Corporation Plc, registered in the U.S. Pat. and TM office and elsewhere.

Hiroshige and Marigold are trademarks of AlphaOmega Typography, Inc.

Table of Contents

1 Introduction........................................................... 17

About This Guide .................................................................................... 17

Warnings and Special Information ................................................... 17

Related Product Information ............................................................ 18

Software Features ..................................................................................19

PCL-II ...............................................................................................19

P-Series ........................................................................................... 19

Proprinter III XL ................................................................................ 20

Epson FX-1050 ................................................................................ 20

Installing Emulations ........................................................................ 20

2 HP PCL-II ............................................................. 27

Introduction ............................................................................................. 27

HP PCL-II Emulation Default Settings.............................................. 28

Switching Between the Emulations ..................................................28

Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes............................ 29

Printer Feature Set Compatibility ..................................................... 29

General Information ......................................................................... 30

Escape Sequences .......................................................................... 31

Bar Codes ........................................................................................ 34

US Postnet Barcodes ....................................................................... 43

Character Density Selection............................................................. 47

Character Font Selection ................................................................. 50

Character Overstrike ........................................................................ 53

Character Style Selection................................................................. 53

Cursor Control ..................................................................................54

Display Functions Mode ................................................................... 55

Horizontal Margin Selection ............................................................. 55

Line Spacing .................................................................................... 56

Logical Page Length Selection......................................................... 56

Perforation Skip Mode...................................................................... 57

Print Mode Selection ........................................................................ 58

Print Pitch Selection ......................................................................... 58

Printing in the Hex 80 through Hex FF Region................................. 58

PTX Linefeed ................................................................................... 59

Programmable Reset ....................................................................... 60

Table of Contents

Programmable VFC ......................................................................... 60

Raster Graphics ............................................................................... 69

Self-test ............................................................................................ 71

Standard (Computed) VFC .............................................................. 71

Stroke Weight (Bold) ........................................................................ 71

Switching Character Fonts ............................................................... 71

Text Length (Vertical Margin) Selection ........................................... 72

Transparent Print Data ..................................................................... 72

Underline Mode ................................................................................ 72

Vertical Forms Control (VFC) ........................................................... 73

HP 3000 Information............................................................................... 74

Feature Access and Transparent Modes ......................................... 74

VFC Download with a Serial Interface ............................................. 74

Carriage-Control Directives .............................................................. 75

Graphics ........................................................................................... 75

Printing in the Perforation Skip Region ............................................ 75

HP 1000 Information............................................................................... 76

Downloading VFC ............................................................................ 76

Perforation Skip Mode...................................................................... 76

3 P-Series Printer Emulation ................................... 77

Overview................................................................................................. 77

P-Series Default Values and States ................................................. 78

Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes ........................ 80

Format for Control Code Descriptions.............................................. 80

Switching Between the Emulations .................................................. 80

Special Function Control Code (SFCC) Header .............................. 81

SFCC Command Line ...................................................................... 81

Attribute Set and Reset Codes......................................................... 82

NUL Code ........................................................................................ 82

Print Modes Supported for Character Sets ...................................... 82

The Control Codes ........................................................................... 83

Backspace........................................................................................ 85

Bell ................................................................................................... 85

Bold Print.......................................................................................... 86

Bold Print Reset ............................................................................... 86

Carriage Return................................................................................ 87

Character Set Select ........................................................................ 88

Character Set Select: ECMA Latin 1 Extended................................ 90

Character Set Select: International Languages ............................... 91

Characters 80-9F (Control Codes) ................................................... 92

Characters 80-9F (Printable Symbols) ............................................. 92

Table of Contents

Elongated (Double High) Print, One Line Only................................. 93

Elongated (Double High) Print, Set/Reset........................................ 94

Emphasized Print ............................................................................. 94

Emphasized Print Reset................................................................... 95

Emulation Reset ............................................................................... 95

Expanded Print (Double Wide), One Line Only................................ 96

Expanded Print (Double Wide), Set/Reset ....................................... 96

Extended Character Set ................................................................... 97

Extended Character Set Cancel (Primary Set Select)...................... 97

Form Feed........................................................................................ 98

Forms Length Set (Inches)...............................................................99

Forms Length Set (Lines)................................................................. 99

Line Feed .......................................................................................100

Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)........................................................... 100

Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)........................................................... 101

Line Spacing 8 or 10.3 lpi (1 Line Only) ......................................... 101

Line Spacing 7/72 Inch...................................................................102

Line Spacing n/72 Inch...................................................................103

Line Spacing n/216 Inch................................................................. 104

Overscoring .................................................................................... 104

Plot, Even Dot (P-Series High Density Graphics) .......................... 105

Plot, Odd Dot (P-Series Normal Density Graphics)........................ 105

Print Mode/Pitch Selection .............................................................106

Reverse .......................................................................................... 109

Superscript/Subscript Printing ........................................................ 110

Superscript/Subscript Printing Reset.............................................. 110

Underline ........................................................................................ 111

VFU Commands............................................................................. 111

Vertical Tab .................................................................................... 111

4 IBM Proprinter III XL Emulation .......................... 113

Overview............................................................................................... 113

Proprinter III XL Emulation Default Settings...................................114

Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes........... 116

Format for Control Code Descriptions............................................ 116

Escape Control Codes Overview ................................................... 116

Graphics Control Codes Overview ................................................. 117

Switching Between the Emulations ................................................119

The Control Codes ......................................................................... 120

Backspace...................................................................................... 122

Bell ................................................................................................. 122

Bit Image Mode, Single Density (Normal Speed)........................... 123

Table of Contents

Bit Image Mode, Double Density (Half Speed) .............................. 124

Bit Image Mode, Double Density (Normal Speed) ......................... 125

Bit Image Mode, Quadruple Density (Half Speed) ......................... 126

Bold Printing ................................................................................... 127

Bold Printing, Cancel...................................................................... 127

Cancel ............................................................................................ 128

Carriage Return.............................................................................. 128

Carriage Return Set ....................................................................... 129

Character Pitch 12 cpi.................................................................... 129

Character Set Select: Set 1 (A) ...................................................... 129

Character Set Select: Set 2 (B) ...................................................... 129

Condensed Print ............................................................................ 130

Condensed Print, Cancel ............................................................... 130

Deselect Printer.............................................................................. 131

Double Wide Print .......................................................................... 131

Double Wide Print (One Line Only) ................................................ 132

Double Wide Print (One Line Only) Cancel.................................... 132

Emphasized Print ........................................................................... 133

Emphasized Print, Cancel.............................................................. 133

Form Feed...................................................................................... 134

Forms Length Set in Inches ........................................................... 134

Forms Length Set in Lines ............................................................. 135

Initialize Parameters....................................................................... 136

Line Feed ....................................................................................... 138

Line Feed n/216 Inch (One Line Only) ........................................... 139

Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)........................................................... 140

Line Spacing 7/72 Inch (10.3 lpi).................................................... 140

Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Executes) ................................................ 141

Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Storage)................................................... 142

Line Spacing n/216 Inch................................................................. 143

Margin, Bottom ............................................................................... 144

Margin Cancel, Bottom................................................................... 144

Margins, Horizontal ........................................................................ 144

Overscoring .................................................................................... 145

Print All Characters ........................................................................ 145

Print Next Character....................................................................... 146

Print Mode ...................................................................................... 146

Print Quality.................................................................................... 147

Proportional Spacing ...................................................................... 147

Select Attributes ............................................................................. 148

Set Top-of-Form ............................................................................. 149

Superscript/Subscript Printing ........................................................ 150

Table of Contents

Superscript/Subscript Printing, Cancel........................................... 150

Tab, Horizontal ............................................................................... 151

Tab Set/Clear, Horizontal ............................................................... 151

Tab, Vertical ................................................................................... 152

Tab Set/Clear, Vertical ...................................................................153

Tabs, Clear All (Return to default).................................................. 153

Underline ........................................................................................ 154

Unidirectional Printing .................................................................... 154

5 Epson FX-1050 Emulation.................................. 155

Overview............................................................................................... 155

Epson FX-1050 Default Values and States.................................... 156

Epson Emulation Exceptions and Differences ............................... 158

Epson Character Sets .................................................................... 159

Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes ........... 160

Format for Control Code Descriptions............................................ 160

Escape Sequences ....................................................................... 160

Attribute Set and Reset Codes....................................................... 161

NUL Code ...................................................................................... 161

Switching Between the Emulations ................................................161

The Control Codes ......................................................................... 162

Backspace...................................................................................... 165

Bell ................................................................................................. 165

Cancel Line .................................................................................... 165

Carriage Return.............................................................................. 166

Character Pitch 10 CPI .................................................................. 166

Character Pitch 12 CPI .................................................................. 166

Character Pitch 15 CPI .................................................................. 166

Character Set Select: International Languages .............................167

Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 0 ......................................... 168

Condensed Print ............................................................................ 168

Condensed Print Reset .................................................................. 169

Cut-Sheet / Paper Feed Control..................................................... 169

Define a Download Character ........................................................ 169

Delete Character ............................................................................ 169

Double High Print, Set/Reset ......................................................... 170

Double Strike.................................................................................. 170

Double Strike, Cancel .................................................................... 171

Double Wide Print ..........................................................................171

Double Wide Print (One Line) ........................................................ 172

Double Wide Print (One Line), Cancel ........................................... 172

Emphasized Print ........................................................................... 173

Table of Contents

Emphasized Print, Cancel.............................................................. 173

Enable Printing Hex Codes 00-1F and 80-9F ................................ 173

Form Feed...................................................................................... 175

Graphics, Standard Density ........................................................... 175

Graphics, Double Density .............................................................. 176

Graphics, Double Density Double Speed....................................... 177

Graphics, Quadruple Density ......................................................... 178

Half Speed Mode, On/Off ............................................................... 178

Horizontal Tab Execute .................................................................. 179

Horizontal Tab Set/Release ........................................................... 179

Initialize Printer............................................................................... 180

Italic Printing................................................................................... 180

Italic Printing, Cancel ..................................................................... 180

Line Feed ....................................................................................... 181

Line Feed n/216 Inch ..................................................................... 181

Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)........................................................... 182

Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)........................................................... 182

Line Spacing 7/72 Inch................................................................... 183

Line Spacing n/216 Inch................................................................. 183

Line Spacing n/72 Inch................................................................... 184

Make Hex 80-9F Control Codes..................................................... 184

Make Hex 80-9F Printable ............................................................. 184

Master Print Select ......................................................................... 186

Paper Out Detection, Enable ......................................................... 186

Paper Out Detection, Disable......................................................... 187

Pass Bit 7 from Host ...................................................................... 187

Printer Select.................................................................................. 187

Printer Deselect.............................................................................. 187

Reassign Graphics Mode ............................................................... 188

Remove Downloaded Characters .................................................. 188

Select Graphics Mode .................................................................... 189

Select Italic Character Set.............................................................. 190

Select 9-Pin Graphics Mode .......................................................... 190

Select Print Quality......................................................................... 191

Select/Deselect Proportional Spacing ............................................ 191

Select Serif or Sans Serif Font ....................................................... 192

Select User-Defined Font ............................................................... 192

Select Vertical Tab Channel........................................................... 192

Set Absolute Horizontal Print Position in 1/60 Inch ........................ 193

Set Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 1 ............................................ 193

Set Form Length in Inches ............................................................. 193

Set Form Length in Lines ............................................................... 194

Table of Contents

Set Intercharacter Spacing in 1/120 Inch ....................................... 195

Set Margin, Left .............................................................................. 195

Set Margin, Right ........................................................................... 195

Set Relative Horizontal Print Position in 1/120 Inch ....................... 196

Set Vertical Tabs in Channels ........................................................ 196

Skip Over Perforation ..................................................................... 197

Skip Over Perforation, Cancel........................................................ 197

Superscript and Subscript Printing ................................................. 198

Superscript and Subscript Printing, Cancel.................................... 198

Underline ........................................................................................ 199

Unidirectional Printing, 1 Line......................................................... 199

Unidirectional Printing, Set/Reset................................................... 199

Vertical Tab, Execute ..................................................................... 200

Vertical Tab, Set/Clear ...................................................................200

6 Graphics ............................................................. 201

Overview............................................................................................... 201

Bit Image Graphics ............................................................................... 201

Designing a Bit Image Pattern ....................................................... 203

Bit Image Density ........................................................................... 203

Bit Image Programming Format ..................................................... 204

Bit Image Sample Program ............................................................ 205

Plot Mode.............................................................................................. 206

Plot Density .................................................................................... 206

Plot Data Byte Format .................................................................... 207

Plot Data Line Format .................................................................... 208

Plotting the Data............................................................................. 210

Exiting from P-Series Plot Mode .................................................... 211

Combining Graphics and Text .............................................................. 212

Plot Data Byte Dot Patterns ........................................................... 213

7 Vertical Page Formatting .................................... 215

Overview............................................................................................... 215

Planning a Vertical Page Format .......................................................... 215

VFU Characteristics ....................................................................... 216

Proprinter and Epson Vertical Tab Table.............................................. 216

Executing Vertical Tabs ................................................................. 216

Vertical Tab Positions .................................................................... 217

P-Series EVFU (Electronic Vertical Format Unit) ................................. 218

Start Load Code - Hex 1E .............................................................. 218

Channel Assignment ...................................................................... 218

End Load - Hex 1F ......................................................................... 218

Using the EVFU ............................................................................. 219

Table of Contents

Clearing the EVFU Memory ........................................................... 220

A Standard ASCII Character Set ........................... 221

B P-Series Emulation Character Sets.................... 223

Introduction ........................................................................................... 223

IBM PC, Primary Subset: ASCII (USA)................................................. 224

IBM PC, Primary Subset: French.......................................................... 225

IBM PC, Primary Subset: German........................................................ 226

IBM PC, Primary Subset: English (UK)................................................. 227

IBM PC, Primary Subset: Danish.......................................................... 228

IBM PC, Primary Subset: Swedish ....................................................... 229

IBM PC, Primary Subset: Italian ........................................................... 230

IBM PC, Primary Subset: Spanish........................................................ 231

IBM PC, Primary Subset: Japanese ..................................................... 232

IBM PC, Primary Subset: French Canadian ......................................... 233

IBM PC, Primary Subset: Latin American............................................. 234

IBM PC, Primary Subset: Danish II....................................................... 235

IBM PC, Primary Subset: Spanish II..................................................... 236

IBM PC, Primary Subset: Latin American II.......................................... 237

IBM PC, Extended Subset: 0437 PC Character Set............................. 238

IBM PC, Extended Subset: 0850 PC Multilingual ................................. 239

Multinational, ASCII (USA) ................................................................... 240

Multinational, EBCDIC .......................................................................... 241

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: ASCII (USA)....................................... 242

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: German .............................................. 243

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Swedish ............................................. 244

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Danish................................................ 245

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Norwegian.......................................... 246

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Finnish ............................................... 247

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: English (UK)....................................... 248

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Dutch.................................................. 249

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: French................................................ 250

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Spanish .............................................. 251

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Italian ................................................. 252

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Turkish ............................................... 253

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Japanese ........................................... 254

ECMA Latin 1, Extended Subset: Multinational .................................... 255

ECMA Latin 1, Extended Subset: Barcode 10 cpi ................................ 256

ECMA Latin 1, Extended Subset: Greek .............................................. 257

ECMA Latin 1, Extended Subset: Graphic............................................ 258

ECMA Latin 1, Extended Subset: Scientific 10 cpi ............................... 259

DEC Multinational, ASCII (USA)........................................................... 260

Table of Contents

DEC Multinational, French.................................................................... 261

DEC Multinational, German .................................................................. 262

DEC Multinational, English (UK)........................................................... 263

DEC Multinational, Norwegian/Danish.................................................. 264

DEC Multinational, Swedish ................................................................. 265

DEC Multinational, Italian ..................................................................... 266

DEC Multinational, Spanish .................................................................. 267

DEC Multinational, Japanese ............................................................... 268

DEC Multinational, French Canadian ................................................... 269

DEC Multinational, Dutch...................................................................... 270

DEC Multinational, Finnish ...................................................................271

DEC Multinational, Swiss...................................................................... 272

OCR A .................................................................................................. 273

OCR B .................................................................................................. 274

C Proprinter Emulation Character Sets ................. 275

Introduction ........................................................................................... 275

0437 PC Character Set......................................................................... 276

0850 PC Multilingual............................................................................. 277

OCR A .................................................................................................. 278

OCR B .................................................................................................. 279

D Epson Emulation Character Sets ....................... 281

Introduction ........................................................................................... 281

0437 PC Character Set......................................................................... 282

0850 PC Multilingual............................................................................. 283

Epson Set, ASCII (USA) ....................................................................... 284

Epson Set, French ................................................................................285

Epson Set, German .............................................................................. 286

Epson Set, English (UK) ....................................................................... 287

Epson Set, Danish I .............................................................................. 288

Epson Set, Swedish.............................................................................. 289

Epson Set, Italian.................................................................................. 290

Epson Set, Spanish I ............................................................................ 291

Epson Set, Japanese............................................................................ 292

Epson Set, Norwegian ..........................................................................293

Epson Set, Danish II ............................................................................. 294

Epson Set, Spanish II ........................................................................... 295

Epson Set, Latin American I ................................................................. 296

Epson Set, French Canadian................................................................ 297

Epson Set, Latin American II ................................................................ 298

OCR A .................................................................................................. 299

OCR B .................................................................................................. 300

Table of Contents

1

Introduction

About This Guide

This manual explains how to work with the standard emulations equipped with your printer so that it works properly and efficiently.

The Technical Reference Manual is designed so that you can quickly find the information you need to use and configure your Hewlett-Packard

®

LineJet™ printer.

Warnings and Special Information

Read and comply with all information highlighted under special headings:

Warning Warning messages call attention to situations that could hurt you or damage the equipment.

Caution Conditions that could damage the printer or related equipment.

Note A note gives you helpful hints about printer operation and maintenance.

17

Chapter 1 About This Guide

Related Product Information

Refer to the following books for printer operation:

• LineJet Printers: User’s Guide

Provides configuration instructions and descriptions and troubleshooting guidelines.

• LineJet Printers: Quick Reference Guide

Describes the keys on the control panel and provides quick reference information on daily printer operations such as loading paper and replacing ribbons. Italian, French, German, and Spanish are included.

• LineJet Printers: Maintenance Manual

This manual is not shipped with the printer, but can be ordered. It explains how to maintain and repair the LineJet printer at the field service level of maintenance. This manual covers alignments and adjustments, preventive and corrective maintenance, troubleshooting, and basic principles of operation.

18

PCL-II

Software Features

This section outlines many of the features available with the software described in this manual.

PCL-II

The PCL ® -II emulation software provides the following features:

• Graphics and a selection of print densities. You can enable graphics mode and specify a density mode (dots per inch).

• Print Attributes. Characters can be bold, italic, double high, double wide, etc.

• Page Formatting. PCL-II commands allow you to set line spacing, page length, and vertical forms control.

• Font Typefaces. Also referred to as print modes. The five typefaces include Near Letter Quality (NLQ), Data Processing (DP), High Speed

(HS), OCR A, and OCR B.

• Character Sets. Forty-seven character sets are available. You can print the character sets in the different print modes. (OCR A and B character sets must be printed in OCR A and OCR B print modes.)

• Bar codes. Several bar codes are available, including Code 3 of 9,

Industrial 2 of 5, Interleaved 2 of 5, UPC A, EAN 8, EAN 13, UCC/EAN-

128, UPCE, Royal Mail (including KIX format), Postnet ® 11.3 cpi, and

Postnet 4 cpi.

P-Series

The P-Series emulation software provides the following features:

• Graphics and a selection of print densities. You can enable graphics mode and specify a density mode (dots per inch).

• Print Attributes. Characters can be bold, double high, double wide, etc.

• Page Formatting. Commands allow you to set line spacing, page length, and vertical tabbing.

• Font Typefaces. Also referred to as print modes. The five typefaces include: Near Letter Quality (NLQ) with or without serifs, Data Processing

(DP), High Speed (HS), OCR A, and OCR B.

• Different character sets are available. You can print the character sets in the different print modes. (OCR A and B character sets must be printed in

OCR A and OCR B print modes.)

19

Chapter 1 Software Features

Proprinter III XL

The Proprinter

®

emulation software provides the following features:

• Graphics and print densities. You can specify different graphics modes which use different dpi’s (dots per inch).

• Print Attributes. Characters can be bold, italic, double high, double wide, etc.

• Page Formatting. Commands allow you to set line spacing, page length, and vertical tabbing.

• Font Typefaces. Also referred to as print modes. The five typefaces include: Near Letter Quality (NLQ) with or without serifs, Data Processing

(DP), High Speed (HS), OCR A, and OCR B.

• Numerous character sets are available. You can print the character sets in the different print modes. (OCR A and B character sets must be printed in OCR A and OCR B print modes.)

Epson FX-1050

The Epson ® emulation software provides the following features:

• Graphics and print densities. You can enable graphics mode and specify a density mode (dots per inch).

• Print Attributes. Characters can be bold, italic, double high, double wide, etc.

• Page Formatting. Epson commands allow you to set line spacing, page length, and vertical tabbing.

• Font Typefaces. Also referred to as print modes. The five typefaces include: Near Letter Quality (NLQ) with or without serifs, Data Processing

(DP), High Speed (HS), OCR A, and OCR B.

• Character Sets. Thirty character sets are available. You can print the character sets in the different print modes. (OCR A and B character sets must be printed in OCR A and OCR B print modes.)

Installing Emulations

Flash memory is contained in SIMMs (single in-line memory modules) located on the controller board. Printer emulation and operating system software are loaded into flash memory at the factory, but you will install software in some situations:

• You buy the IGP ® /PGL ® or Code V™ graphics option after the printer is installed

• You need to upgrade printer software

• You need different emulation software

• You have replaced the controller board

• You have added or replaced the flash memory SIMM

20

Installing Emulations

Emulation and operating system software are stored as compressed files on more than one 3.5 inch floppy diskette. You will recombine the multiple files from the diskettes into one file on your computer’s hard disk in order to download the file to the printer. To assist in this process, the MS-DOS ® based program PKUNZIP ® is included on the last diskette with the program file.

You can load software through either the serial or parallel port of the printer.

The load commands are different, depending on the printer port you use.

These differences are explained in the note following step 26.

1.

Make a printout of all saved configurations. (Refer to your User’s Guide .)

Installing new software erases all saved configurations. You will use the printouts to restore printer configuration.

2.

Set the printer power switch to O (off).

3.

If the printer is already connected to the serial or parallel port of a computer capable of running an MS-DOS based PKZIP self-extracting file, go to step 9. If not, go to step 4.

4.

Unplug the AC power cord from the printer.

5.

Disconnect all data input cables from the printer interface. If the printer has an internal Ethernet interface card, do the following: a.

Cabinet models: remove the paper path

Pedestal models: remove the top cover assembly

(refer to your Maintenance Manual ).

b.

Unplug the Centronics I/O cable from the Ethernet interface card.

c.

Secure the loose end of the Centronics I/O cable to prevent the connector from contacting any other exposed components.

d.

Attach the parallel cable connector from the computer to the

Centronics I/O connector.

6.

Connect a parallel data cable to the LPT1 port or a serial data cable to the

COM1 port of an IBM

®

-compatible computer that is using the PC-DOS™ or MS-DOS

®

operating system.

NOTE: You can connect the cable to the LPT2 port if the LPT1 port is already in use. The load commands are different if you use this port, as described in the note after step 26.

7.

Connect the data cable to the appropriate I/O port of the printer.

8.

Plug the AC power cord into the printer.

9.

Power on the computer.

10. Create a directory on your computer hard drive where you will store the recombined files from the emulation diskettes by typing the following at the DOS prompt:

MD DOWNLOAD<return>

11. Make the newly created directory the “active” directory by typing the following at the DOS prompt:

CD DOWNLOAD<return>

12. Insert the last diskette in the series (e.g., 2 of 2, 3 of 3, etc.) into diskette drive A (or B) of the computer.

21

Chapter 1 Software Features

13. Get the name of the compressed file on the diskette by typing the following at the DOS prompt:

DIR A:<return> (If the diskette is in drive B, type DIR B:<return>)

The compressed file on the diskette takes the form FILENAME.ZIP

, where the filename is a six digit number (e.g., 123456.zip).

14. At the DOS prompt type:

A:\PKUNZIP A:\ FILENAME (Replace A: with B: if you are using the B dirve), where FILENAME is the six digit number you noted in the previous step.

15. The PKUNZIP program will execute, and the following message will appear on the computer screen:

Insert disk #1 - Press a key when ready

16. Remove the diskette in the disk drive and insert the diskette labeled

Disk 1 of 2 (or 1 of 3, etc.)

17. Press the <return> key. After the file is decompressed to the hard drive, the following message will appear on the computer screen:

Insert disk #2 - Press a key when ready

18. Remove the diskette in the disk drive and insert the diskette labeled

Disk 2 of 2 (or 2 of 3, etc.)

19. Press the <return> key. If there are only two diskettes for the emulation, you will be returned to the DOS prompt when the decompression is complete. If there are three diskettes, you will be asked to insert disk #3 and press a key.

20. When all diskettes have been decompressed, type the following at the

DOS prompt:

DIR<return>

You will see a directory listing containing the file FILENAME.EXE

, where the filename is the six digit number (e.g., 123456.exe) you noted above.

This is the file you will download into the printer.

21. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the ON LINE + PAPER

ADVANCE keys. Without releasing the keys, power the printer on.

Continue holding the ON LINE and PAPER ADVANCE keys down.

22. When you see “WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD” on the LCD, release the ON LINE and PAPER ADVANCE keys.

NOTE: The port default is CENTRONICS; this is the standard load through the parallel port. If you want to use the default, continue at step 18.

23. Press the

<

(NEXT) key; “SELECT DOWNLOAD

PORT=DATAPRODUCT” appears on the LCD.

22

Installing Emulations

24. Press

<

(NEXT) again to cycle through the download ports available in the printer:

DATAPRODUCT (parallel)

CENTRONICS* (parallel) (default port)

RS232-9600 (RS-232 serial, 9600 baud)

RS232-19.2K (RS-232 serial, 19200 baud)

RS232-38.4K (RS-232 serial, 38400 baud)

RS232-115K (RS-232 serial, 115000 baud)

RS422-9600 (RS-422 serial, 9600 baud)

RS422-19.2 (RS-422 serial, 19200 baud)

RS422-38.4K (RS-422 serial, 38400 baud)

RS422-115K (RS-422 serial, 115000 baud)

25. When the printer download port you want to use is displayed on the LCD, press ENTER. “WAITING DOWNLOAD / PORT = < your selection > appears on the display.

26. At the DOS prompt on the computer type:

FILENAME.EXE -pb<return> where FILENAME.EXE is the compressed file you noted in step 20. This command decompresses the file on the hard drive and copies it as a binary file into the flash memory on the printer controller board.

NOTE: If you are loading the file using the LPT2 port on the computer, enter the following DOS command:

FILENAME.EXE -pb 2 <Return>

The 9600 baud rate is the only selection older versions of DOS can use. The baud rate information entered in the following DOS commands must match the selection you made in step 25.

If you are loading the file through the printer serial port, enter the following DOS commands:

MODE COM1:9600,N,8,1,P<Return>

FILENAME.EXE -pbc1<Return>

27. While the file is copied into memory, the printer LCD informs you of the load process and status. (LCD messages are listed in Table 1.)

28. When the new program has successfully loaded into memory and the printer has reset itself, set the printer power switch to O (off).

29. Unplug the AC power cord from the printer.

30. Remove the diskette from the computer and store it with the printer.

31. Power off the computer.

32. If you had to install a data cable to the computer and printer in step 6, disconnect it from the computer and printer.

33. Reconnect the customer’s data input cable(s) to the printer, if required.

34. Return the printer to normal operation.

35. Using the configuration printout(s) you made in step 1, reconfigure the printer.

23

Chapter 1 Software Features

Table 1. Flash Memory Message Guide

Message

CLEARING PROGRAM

FROM FLASH

DIAGNOSTIC

PASSED

ERROR: DC

PROGRAM

NOT VALID

ERROR: DRAM AT

ADDRESS XXXXXXXX

ERROR: EC

PROGRAM

NOT VALID

ERROR: EC STOPPED

AT STATE XXXX

ERROR: FLASH

DID NOT PROGRAM

ERROR: NO DRAM

DETECTED

ERROR: FLASH

NOT DETECTED

ERROR: NVRAM

FAILURE

ERROR: PROGRAM

NEEDS MORE DRAM

ERROR: PROGRAM

NEEDS MORE FLASH

ERROR: PROGRAM

NOT COMPATIBLE

Explanation Required Action

The program successfully loaded into printer RAM and the checksum matched.

The old program is now being deleted from flash memory.

The printer passed its memory and hardware initialization tests.

Printer cannot find the data controller program or the validation checksum is corrupt.

None

None

The printer found a defective memory location.

Printer cannot find the engine controller program or the validation checksum is corrupt.

Hardware fault in the engine controller.

The printer encountered an error trying to program flash memory.

The printer could not find any DRAM.

The printer could not find any flash memory.

The security PAL is not present or the non-volatile memory has failed.

The printer requires more DRAM memory in order to run the downloaded program.

The printer requires more flash memory in order to run the downloaded program.

Download the program again. If the message occurs again, call your service representative.

Call your service representative.

Download the program again. If the message occurs again, call your service representative.

Call your service representative.

Download the program again. If the message occurs again, call your service representative.

Call your service representative.

Call your service representative.

Call your service representative.

Add DRAM. Call your service representative.

The printer is not compatible with the downloaded program.

Add flash memory. Call your service representative.

Use the correct emulation software option(s) for this model.

24

Installing Emulations

ERROR: SECURITY

PAL NOT DETECTED

ERROR: SHORT AT

ADDRESS XXXX

ERROR: WRITING

TO FLASH

ERROR: WRONG

CHECKSUM

LOADING PROGRAM

FROM PORT XX%

LOADING PROGRAM

INTO FLASH

RESETTING . . .

PLEASE WAIT

RESTORING

BOOT CODE

SECURITY CODE

VIOLATION

Table 1. Flash Memory Message Guide (continued)

Message

ERROR: PROGRAM

NOT VALID

Explanation Required Action

The printer does not see a program in flash memory.

The security PAL is not present or has failed.

Hardware failure in DRAM or CMX controller circuitry.

Hardware or software fault in flash memory.

There is no program in printer memory.

Download program again.

Call your service representative.

Call your service representative.

The printer received the complete program but the checksum did not match. The data were corrupted during download.

The new program is loading into printer

RAM. XX indicates how much of the program has loaded.

The printer has deleted the previous program from flash memory and is loading the new program into flash memory.

The printer finished loading the program into flash memory and is automatically resetting itself.

None

None

Normal download initialization message.

None

Download the program again. If the message occurs again, call your service representative.

Download the program again. If the message occurs again, call your service representative.

None

SENDING PROGRAM

TO EC PROCESSOR

TABLE MISMATCH

DOWNLOAD AGAIN

The software running or being downloaded does not match the security

PAL code.

The printer is loading the engine controller program into the engine controller.

EC software update in progress.

Call your service representative.

None

Download the program again.

25

Chapter 1 Software Features

26

2

HP PCL-II

Introduction

This chapter describes the HP ® PCL-II emulation host control codes that are supported for your LineJet printer. Emulation refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language. A printer control language is the coding system used to convey, manipulate, and print data. It contains character codes and command sequences that configure the emulation. In this manual, the terms emulation, printer protocol, and printer control language are synonymous.

In the HP PCL-II emulation mode, your printer can print files coded for the HP

PCL-II printer control language. To select the PCL-II emulation mode as the active printer emulation, select PCL-II in the ACTIVE EMULATION menu and then the PCL-II menu will appear under the EMULATION menu, as described in the LineJet Printers: User’s Guide .

The PCL-II emulation provides many configurable parameters. The default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 2. You can modify the emulation parameter values in two ways:

• The PCL-II host control codes. An extensive set of PCL-II control code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host computer via the host data stream. Most of this chapter is devoted to describing the

PCL-II control code commands.

• The printer configuration menus. You can modify a subset of the PCL-II emulation parameters using the printer configuration menus and control panel keys as described in the LineJet Printers: User’s Guide .

A parameter value set by a host control code overrides a value set from the printer’s control panel.

Note Configuration values selected from the menus or via host control codes can be saved to memory so that they will not be lost when you power off the printer. The menu selection for saving a configuration to memory is described in the

LineJet Printers: User’s Guide.

27

Chapter 2 Introduction

HP PCL-II Emulation Default Settings

The factory settings for the PCL-II emulation menu options are shown in

Table 2. Host control codes can override the settings for these menu options.

Table 2. PCL-II Menu Option Factory Settings

Default Setting Parameter

Primary/Secondary Character Set

ID

Symbol Set

Pitch

Density

Page Length Representation

Graphics Density

Perforation Skip

Display Functions

LF after CR

CR after LF

CR after FF

CR after VT

PTX Linefeed

LPI Adjust

Page L. /Lines

Page L. /Inches

0

Roman-8(8U)

10.0 cpi

Data Processing

Inches/Page

60 dpi

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Enable

Disable

6 LPI

66 lines

11 Inches

Switching Between the Emulations

The printer supports four emulations: PCL-II (the default), LinePrinter Plus ® ,

Code V™ and IGP/PGL. The LinePrinter Plus has three protocols from which to choose: P-Series, Proprinter III XL, and Epson FX-1050.

You can switch between PCL-II and any of the LinePrinter Plus protocols by sending one of the following commands:

ESC%-00000X

ESC%-00001X

ESC%-00002X

SFCC|};K0

Switches from PCL-II to P-Series

Switches from PCL-II to Proprinter III XL

Switches from PCL-II to Epson FX-1050

Switches from any of the LinePrinter Plus emulations to PCL-II

28

Printer Feature Set Compatibility

Note The SFCC is the Special Function Control Code. From the

P-Series protocol, this code is selectable from the front panel. The default value is hex 01. For the Proprinter and

Epson emulations, the SFCC is always the ESC (hex 1B) character.

Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

The remainder of this chapter describes the PCL-II printer control language codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to the printer.

The escape (ESC) control code is used to select most of the programmable features.

Commands and control codes sent from a host system override settings in the configuration menus. However, any configuration settings from host control codes will be gone once the printer is powered off (or reset to the default values). Host control codes are never reflected in the PCL-II configuration menu. In order to save a configuration, it is necessary to select the desired options from the front panel and save the options to one of the printers eight user-selectable configurations. The LineJet Printers: User’s Guide describes the menu option for saving changes to the printer memory.

Printer Feature Set Compatibility

The printer uses the “Printer Control Language” which standardizes printer features and user access of these features, providing compatibility between

HP printers. “Printer Control Language” structure consists of five feature levels:

• Level I

• Level II

Print and Space

EDP

• Level III

• Level IV

• Level V

Word Processing

Page Formatting

Enhanced Page Formatting

Each PCL level supersedes features of the levels below it. The LineJet printers are Level II printers, meaning that all applications for Level I and II printers will operate correctly on your printer with no modifications. In addition to supporting Level I and Level II features, the printer supports a limited set of additional features that may not be supported by other HP products.

Applications written using these additional features may not operate as intended on other Hewlett-Packard printers which do not have these capabilities.

29

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

General Information

Programmatic Printer Control

Control codes, multi-character escape sequences, and parameterized escape sequences are all used to control the printers.

The printers execute parameters sequentially, in the order they are received.

Therefore, the order of the parameters is significant. Unrecognized escape sequences are ignored in their entirety and may cause erroneous printing since the printer may be unable to perform the requested operation.

Logical and Physical Pages

The limits of the logical page determine the area in which printing can take place. Logical page length is set programmatically (in lines per page).

Physical page length is set via the control panel and indicates the actual size of a single page. The physical page length cannot be changed programmatically. Refer to the LineJet Printers: Quick Reference Guide for more information.

Function

Backspace

Horizontal

Tab

Line Feed

Form Feed

Carriage

Return

Shift Out

Symbol

BS

HT

LF

FF

CR

Table 3. Control Codes

Binary Level

1000

1001

II

V

1010

1100

1101 I

I

I

Description

Move one column left.

Move the current active position to the next tab stop on the current line. The tab stops are at the left margin and every 8th column between the left and right margins. If new position crosses the right margin, the new position is set to the right margin.

Move to next print line while maintaining current column position

Move to first line at top of the next page while maintaining current column position

Move to the left margin on current print line

SO 1110 I

Shift In SI

Escape ESC

1111

11011

I

I

Select following characters from the current secondary character font until receipt of a

Shift In

Select following characters from the current primary character font until receipt of a Shift

Out

The following characters are a special control sequence

30

Escape Sequences

Escape Sequences

An escape sequence consists of the ESC control code followed by one or more characters in succession. Both two-character and parameterized escape sequences control the printer. Two-character escape sequences take the form ESCX, where X is a character from the ASCII table (0 through ~).

Parameterized escape sequences are structured in the following form:

ESCXy[parameter]Z

This sequence is explained below:

ESCXy Prefix. This part of the escape sequence indicates that the escape sequence is parameterized and also specifies which type of control is being performed. “X” is referred to as the parameterized character; “y” is referred to as the group character.

Parameter This string of ASCII characters specifies a value (either numeric or alphanumeric).

Z Terminator. This ASCII character indicates the function to which the previous parameter value applies. If this character is lower case (a,b,c, etc.), it indicates a combined escape sequence, meaning that more parameterized information will follow. If the character is upper case (A,B,C, etc.), it terminates the escape sequence string.

Note Brackets [ ] are shown in many of the escape sequences for clarification purposes, but are not actually part of the escape sequence. For example, the brackets in the escape sequence for selecting page length (ESC&l[1-128]P) specify a range of values (1 through 128) for page length. To specify a page length of 35 lines, the escape sequence ESC&l35P would be sent to the printer.

Combining Escape Sequences

Parameterized escape sequences can be combined to save keystrokes.

Combining sequences involves adding the parameter value and terminator of one or more sequences to another escape sequence. Parameterized sequences can be combined only if their prefixes are identical. When a parameter/terminator of one sequence is added to another sequence, all of the terminators except the last should be lower case. For example, to set the left and right margins using two separate escape sequences, the following two sequences would be sent:

Set left margin at position 10

Set right margin at position 99

ESC&a10L

ESC&a99M

Using one combined escape sequence, the following would be sent to the printer:

ESC&a10l99M

31

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

The list below shows the escape sequences you can use with the printer.

Note that the brackets [ ] used in these escape sequences are for clarification purposes only (the brackets are not actually part of the commands).

FUNCTION

PCL LEVEL I

ASCII CODE PAGE

Display Functions Mode on

Display Functions Mode off

Perforation Skip Mode on

Perforation Skip Mode off

Raster Graphics end

Self-test

Stroke Weight (Bold)

Underline Mode on

Underline Mode off

ESCY

ESCZ

ESC&l1L

ESC&l0L

Print Mode Selection (10 & 16.67 cpi) ESC&l[0,2]S

Programmable reset ESCE

Raster Graphics start

Raster Graphics data

ESC*rA

ESC*b[#]W[ data ]

ESC*rB

ESCz

69

71

ESC[(,)]s[#]B 71

ESC&d[DEFGLMNOTUVW\}^] 72

ESC&d[@CHIJKPQRSWXZ[] 72

58

60

69

69

55

55

57

57

PCL LEVEL II

Character Font Selection

Cursor Control (absolute row)

Cursor Control (absolute column)

Cursor Control (relative row)

Cursor Control (relative column)

Horizontal Margin Selection (Left)

PCL LEVEL III

ESC[(,)] ID

ESC&a[#]R

ESC&a[#]C

ESC&a[+#]R

ESC&a[+/-#]C

ESC&a[ print position ]L

Horizontal Margin Selection (Right) ESC&a[

Horizontal Margin Selection (Reset) ESC9 print position ]M

Line Spacing

Logical Page Length Selection

ESC&l[6,8]D

ESC&l[1-128]P

Print Pitch Selection ESC[(,)]s[ Cpi ]H

Text Length (Vertical Margin) Selection ESC&l[1-128]F

Transparent Print Data ESC&p[ # of bytes ]X

54

55

55

55

50

54

54

54

56

56

58

72

72

Character Density Selection

Character Style Selection

Print Mode Selection (12 cpi)

ESC[(,)]s[0,1,-1]Q

ESC[(,)]s[0,1]S

ESC&l4S

47

53

58

32

Escape Sequences

Additional Commands

Bar Code Data

Bar Code Height

Bar Code Header Control

Bar Code Label Placement

Bar Code Selection

Emulation Switching

Print Mode Selection (double size)

PTX Linefeed

ESC*z[< bar code data> ]Z

ESC*z[#]H

ESC*z[#]Q

ESC*z[#]C

ESC*z[#]V

ESC%-[0000,0001,0002]X

ESC&l8S

ESC*t[0,1]L

Programmable VFC ESC&l[ #bytes ]W[ data ]

Raster Graphics: Move # raster lines ESC*b[#]Y

Raster Graphics: Resolution ESC*t[70,140]R

Raster Graphics: Horizontal ResolutionESC*r[60,70,120,140]L

Raster Graphics: Vertical Resolution ESC*r[72,144]V

Standard (Computed) VFC ESC&l[0-16]V

60

69

69

69

69

73

34

28

58

59

34

34

34

34

33

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

Bar Codes

To print bar codes, escape sequences are sent to the printer specifying the type of code, bar code height, bar code header information, placement information, and bar code data. The following five escape sequences are used for bar code printing:

ESC*z#V Bar Code Selection

This sequence selects the type of bar code to be used in subsequent printing of bar code data. If a number other than those available is selected, the previously selected bar code type will be used. The following table lists the bar code types available and their corresponding value field numbers.

Table 4. Bar Code Types

Bar Code Type

Code 3 of 9 (default)

Industrial 2 of 5

Interleaved 2 of 5

UPC A

UPC E

EAN 8

EAN 13

UCC/EAN-128

Postnet

Royal Mail (including KIX format)

Character Length

Variable

Variable

Variable

Fixed

Fixed

Fixed

Fixed

Fixed

Fixed

Variable

Value Field No.

9

10

11

12

4

8

0

1

13, 14

15, 16

Note The Postnet Barcodes type 13 & 14 print 24 bars per inch.

See the section on 256x Postal Barcodes for information on the 20 bars per inch and 22.5 bars per inch Postal Barcodes.

ESC*z#H Bar Code Height

This escape sequence defines the height of the bar code label in tenths of an inch as specified in the value field (#). To specify a bar code height of .8 inches, the ESC*z8H escape sequence would be sent to the printer. A zero in the value field specifies that bar code height is determined by the current line spacing (1/6 or 1/8 inch for 6/8 LPI respectively, or 1/3 or 1/4 inch for doublehigh/double-wide). The default bar code height is 0.6 inches.

34

Bar Codes

ESC*z#C Bar Code Label Placement

This escape sequence specifies the horizontal starting location of a bar code by specifying the column number based on the currently active print pitch.

The value field (#) indicates the absolute column position the bar code will begin printing. A plus or minus sign in the value field is ignored. A value field whose position is less than the current active printing position is illegal and causes the cursor to move to the next column position to the right of the current active printing position. When printing bar codes, always allow at least

1/4 inch margin in all directions from each bar code. This will limit the interference from other characters and help readability. If you need to print text and bar codes on the same line, see the “Printing Bar Codes With Text” discussion later in this chapter.

ESC*z#Q Bar Code Header Control

This sequence specifies the placement of the bar code header. A number 1 in the value field specifies that a header will be printed above the bar code label and a 2 specifies that it will be placed below the bar code. A zero in the value field specifies that no header will be printed. The printer default places the header above the bar code.

ESC*z<Bar Code Data>Z Bar Code Label Data

This sequence sends the bar code label data in the form of an alphanumeric string enclosed in angled brackets. The header (if enabled) will print in the location specified by the bar code header control sequence.

Note Upon termination of the bar code label data escape sequence, the printer will print all buffered bar code data and generate a carriage return.

The printer automatically formats the bar code, inserts start and stop bits, and calculates and inserts the checksum (if applicable-not for Code 3 of 9,

Industrial 2 of 5, or Interleaved 2 of 5 ).

For UPC E bar codes, a zero (0) must be in the first position of the bar code data.

35

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

Printing Bar Codes

Generally, sending bar code information to the printer is performed in two steps:

Step 1: Selecting the bar code printing specifications; bar code type, height, and header control information.

Step 2: Moving the cursor to the desired label location and sending the bar code data.

Step 1.

Before positioning and printing the bar code data, the type of code, height of the label, and header placement may be specified. Once this is done, the succeeding labels will be printed using these specifications until a new type, height, or header control is specified. In other words, the bar code print specifications can be sent once and need not be sent again unless the printer is reset or new print specifications are desired. The following example specifies the print specifications for bar codes that are 0.5 inches in height, have a header above the label, and are printed in the UPC A code.

ESC*z8v5h1Q

ESC*z8v Select UPC A code

5h Label is to be .5 inches high

1Q Places header above bar code

Notice that the last letter in the escape sequence (Q) is upper-case while the other letters in the sequence (v and h) are lower-case. (See “Escape

Sequences” on page 31 for more information concerning combining two or more sequences.)

Step 2.

To print a bar code label, the cursor must be placed in the desired position and the bar code data must be sent. The following escape sequence moves the cursor to column 25, sends the data “1234567” to the printer, and initiates printing.

ESC*z25c<1234567>Z

ESC*z25c Places start of label at column 25

< Indicates start of bar code data

1234567 Bar code data

> Signals end of bar code data

Z Upper case Z initiates printing *

*Note that an upper-case “Z” terminator results in the bar code being printed and an automatic carriage return (CR) being executed.

36

Bar Codes

Printing Multiple Labels On The Same Line

Printing more than one label on the same line involves no more than positioning the cursor and sending the data for each label to be printed. Since the termination of the bar code data sequence (signalled by an upper-case Z) causes the bar code to be printed and a carriage return to be executed, all of the label information must be sent in the same escape sequence. The following example shows an escape sequence used to print three labels on a single line:

ESC*z5c<label1>z20c<label2>z35c<label3>Z

ESC*z5c Moves cursor to column 5

<label1> Bar code data z20c Moves cursor to column 20

<label2> Bar code data z35c Moves cursor to column 35

<label3> Bar code data

Z Initiates printing

Printing Bar Codes With Text

When printing bar codes with text, since the printer automatically generates a carriage return and line feed at the end of the terminating character (upper case Z), potential problems exist. As a general rule, for each line of bar code mixed with text, send the text information first, followed by a carriage return without a line feed (ASCII 13), and then overlay the bar code. (The carriage return is required so that the bar code cursor position will be correct.) The following example illustrates how to print text and bar codes on the same line.

This example involves a three-line bar code (and three escape sequences) as shown below:

ESC*z0v25c1q<12345>Z

ESC*z0v Selects Code 3 of 9

25c Moves cursor to column 25

1q Specifies header placement above label

<12345> Bar code data

Z Enables printing this portion of the bar code

ESC*z75CThis is textCRESC*z0q25c<12345>Z

ESC*z75C Moves cursor to column 75

This is text Text for right of bar code

CR Carriage return without a line feed

ESC*z0q Disables header for this portion

25c Moves cursor to column 25

<12345> Bar code data

Z Initiates printing this portion

ESC*z25c0q<12345>Z

ESC*z25c Moves cursor to column 25

0q Disables header for lower portion

<12345> Bar code data

Z Initiates printing for lower portion of label

37

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

Note When a header is enabled, sending one line of information causes the printer to print two lines; one line containing the header along with any text you may have sent in that line, and one line containing the bar code label. When a header is enabled, no information can be printed on the same line as the bar code label. However, if the header is disabled, text can be placed next to the bar code label. For example, if you want a label and also wish to enclose the bar code with a box, you may not use automatic headers. Instead, you may set the height of the bar code to the text height and manually print the header.

Bar Code Width Information

The following paragraphs contain information concerning the size of the printed bar codes. If you are designing a form that contains bar codes, this information may prove useful in judging how much space the bar code will occupy.

The following table lists the number of characters sent by the user for each type of bar code:

Table 5. Bar Code Character

Bar Code Number of Characters Sent

Code 3 of 9

Industrial 2 of 5

Interleaved 2 of 5

UPCA

UPCE

EAN8

EAN13

UCC/EAN-128

Variable

Variable

Variable

11

11

7

12

19

Postnet 5 (6), 9(10), or 11(12)

Royal Mail (incl. KIX) Variable

Note For Postnet Barcodes printed using the LineJet style, if 5, 9, or 11 digits are sent, your printer will automatically calculate and print the check digit. If 6, 10, or 12 digits are sent, the printer will verify the check digit. Should the check digit be inaccurate, or an invalid bar code length is sent, your LineJet printer will not attempt to print the invalid data.

38

Bar Codes

CODE 3 OF 9

A variable-length data string of up to 32 ASCII characters may be printed using the Code 3 of 9 bar code. The string may be an odd or even length and may use any of the standard characters (specified in MIL-STD-1189). If a non-valid character is used in the string, a blank non-readable bar code will be printed; non-valid characters are not substituted or deleted. The width of the printed bar code can be approximated by the following equation:

Width in inches = (number of characters)/3.14 + 0.50

INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5

A variable-length data string of up to 32 ASCII characters may be printed using the Industrial 2 of 5 bar code. The string may be an odd or even length and may use any character from 0 through 9. If a non-valid character is used in the string, a blank non-readable bar code will be printed; non-valid characters are not substituted or deleted. Optional checksums are not inserted in the bar code. The width of the printed bar code can be approximated by the following equation:

Width in inches = (number of characters)/3.7 + 0.38

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5

A variable-length data string of up to 32 ASCII characters may be printed using the Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code. The string may be an odd or even length. However, if the string is an odd length, a leading zero will be inserted to make a string of an even length. Valid data characters are 0 through 9. If a non-valid character is used in the string, a blank non-readable bar code will be printed; non-valid characters are not substituted or deleted. Optional checksums are not inserted in the bar code. The width of the printed bar code can be approximated by the following equations:

Width in inches = (even number of characters)/6.25 + 0.15

UPCA

A fixed-length data string of 11 ASCII characters may be printed using the

UPC A bar code. The string must have a length of 11 and may use any of the standard characters 0 through 9. If a non-valid character or string length is used, a blank non-readable bar code will be printed; non-valid characters are not substituted or deleted. The width of the printed bar code does not vary and is 1.56 inches.

UPCE

A fixed-length data string of 11 ASCII characters may be printed using the

UPC E bar code. The string length must be 11 and may use any of the standard characters 0 through 9 (however, the data pattern must meet the format of UPC E bar codes; UPC E is a shortened version of very specific patterns printable with UPC A). If a non-valid character or string length is used, a blank non-readable bar code will be printed; non-valid characters are not substituted or deleted. For UPC E, a zero (0) is required in the first position of the bar code data (the number system character). The width of the printed bar code is not variable and is 0.81 inches.

39

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

EAN8

A fixed-length data string of 7 ASCII characters may be printed using the EAN

8 bar code. The string length must be 7 and may use any of the standard characters 0 through 9. If a non-valid character or string length is used, a blank non-readable bar code will be printed; non-valid characters are not substituted or deleted. The width of the printed bar code is not variable and is

1.25 inches.

EAN13

A fixed-length data string of 12 ASCII characters may be printed using the

EAN 13 bar code. The string length must be 12 and may use any of the standard characters 0 through 9. If a non-valid character or string length is used, a blank non-readable bar code will be printed; non-valid characters are not substituted or deleted. The width of the printed bar code is not variable and is 1.56 inches.

Royal Mail

A variable length data string may be printed using the “Royal Mail 4 State

Customer Code”. The string may use any character from 0 through 9 and alpha characters A through Z. A complete bar code consists of a set of distinct bars and spaces for each character followed by a checksum character and enclosed by a unique start bar, stop bar and quiet zone. A second version of the Royal Mail barcode prints with no stop bar, start bar or checksum character.

The KIX format for Royal Mail does not include the start/stop code or the check digit, but will allow lowercase alpha characters a through z.

UCC/EAN 128

The UCC/EAN-128 bar code contains special characters which use unique codes to identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code. EAN/UCC 128 supports a full ASCII character set and provides standard alphanumeric keyboard characters and control and special characters.

The EAN/UCC 128 data structure requires an Application Identifier (AI) at the beginning of barcode data. Each AI determines the format and length of the data which follows. Refer to Table 6 for more detail.

Table 6. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers

Application

Identifier (AI)

00

02

10

11 (*)

13 (*)

Content

Serial Shipping Container Code

Item Num. of Goods Within Another Unit

Batch or Lot Number

Production Date (YYMMDD)

Packaging Date (YYMMDD)

Format n2+n18 n2+n14 n2+an..20

n2+n6 n2+n6

40

Bar Codes

Table 6. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers (continued)

Application

Identifier (AI)

328 (***)

329 (***)

330 (***)

331 (***)

332(***)

333 (***)

334 (***)

335 (***)

320 (***)

321 (***)

322 (***)

323 (***)

324 (***)

325 (***)

326 (***)

327 (***)

336 (***)

337 (***)

340 (***)

341 (***)

30

310 (***)

311 (***)

312 (***)

313 (***)

314 (***)

315 (***)

316 (***)

15 (*)

17 (*)

20

21

22

23 (**)

240

250

Content

Sell By Date (Quality) (YYMMDD)

Expiration Date (Safety) (YYMMDD)

Product Variant

Serial Number

HIBCC = Quantity, Date, Batch and Link

Lot Number (Transitional Use)

Additional Product ID Assigned By Manufacturer

Secondary Serial Number

Quantity

Net Weight, Kilograms

Length or 1st Dimension, Meters

Width, Diameter or 2nd Dimension, Meters

Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Meters

Area, Square Meters

Volume, Liters

Volume, Cubic Meters

Net Weight, Pounds

Length or 1st Dimension, Inches

Length or 1st Dimension, Feet

Length or 1st Dimension, Yards

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Inches

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Feet

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Yards

Depth, Thickness, Height, or 3rd Dimension, Inches

Depth, Thickness, Height, or 3rd Dimension, Feet

Depth, Thickness, Height, or 3rd Dimension, Yards

Gross Weight-Kilograms

Length or 1st Dimension, Logistics

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Meters, Logistics

Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Meters, Logistics

Area, Square Meters, Logistics

Gross Volume, Liters

Gross Volume, Cubic Meters

Kilograms Per Square Meter

Gross Weight, Pounds

Length or 1st Dimension, Inches, Logistics

Format n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n2+n..8

n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n2+n6 n2+n6 n2+n2 n2+an..20

n2+an..29

n3+n..19

n3+an..30

n3+an..30

41

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

Table 6. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers (continued)

Application

Identifier (AI)

368 (***)

369 (***)

37

400

401

410

411

412

360 (***)

361 (***)

362 (***)

363 (***)

364 (***)

365 (***)

366 (***)

367 (***)

350 (***)

351 (***)

352 (***)

353 (***)

354 (***)

355 (***)

356 (***)

357 (***)

342 (***)

343 (***)

344 (***)

345 (***)

346 (***)

347 (***)

348 (***)

349 (***)

413

414

420

Content

Length or 1st Dimension, Feet, Logistics

Length or 1st Dimension, Yards, Logistics

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Inches, Logistics

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Feet, Logistics

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Yards, Logistics

Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Inches, Logistics

Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Feet, Logistics

Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Yards, Logistics

Area, Square Inches

Area, Square Feet

Area, Square Yards

Area, Square Inches, Logistics

Area, Square Feet, Logistics

Area, Square Yards, Logistics

Net Weight, Troy Ounce

Net Volume, Ounces

Volume, Quarts

Volume, Gallons

Gross Volume, Quarts

Gross Volume, Gallons

Volume, Cubic Inches

Volume, Cubic Feet

Volume, Cubic Yards

Gross Volume, Cubic Inches

Gross Volume, Cubic Inches

Gross Volume, Cubic Inches

Quantity of Units Contained (For Use With AI 02 Only)

Customer’s Purchase Order Number

Consignment Number

Ship To (Deliver To) Location Code Using EAN-13

Bill To (Invoice To) Location Code Using EAN-13

Purchase From (Location Code of Party From Whom Goods Are

Purchased)

Ship For UCC/EAN Location Code

EAN Location Code For Physical Identification

Ship To (Deliver To) Postal Code Within a Single Postal Authority

Format n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n2+n..8

n3+an..30

n3+an..30

n3+n13 n3+n13 n3+n13 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n3+n13 n3+n13 n3+an..20

42

US Postnet Barcodes

Table 6. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers (continued)

Application

Identifier (AI)

92

93

94

95

8101

8102

90

91

96

97

98

99

421

8001

8003

8004

8005

8006

8018

8100

Content Format

Ship To (Deliver To) Postal Code With 3-Digit ISO Country Code Prefix

Roll Products-Width, Length, Core Diameter, Direction and Splices

UPC/EAN Number and Serial Number or Returnable Asset

UCC/EAN Serial Identification

Identifies the Price Per Unit of Measure

Component of an Article

Service Relation Number

Coupon Extended Code-Number System Character and Offer n3+n3+an..9

n4+n14 n4+n14+an..16

n4+an..30

n4+n6 n4+n14+n2+n2 n4+n18 n4+n1+n5

Coupon Extended Code-Number System Character, Offer and End of Offer n4+n1+n5+n4

Coupon Extended Code-Number System Character Preceded by Zero n4+n1+n1

Mutually Agreed, Between Trading Partners

Intra-Company (Internal) n2+an..30

n2+an..30

Intra-Company (Internal)

Intra-Company (Internal)

Intra-Company (Internal)

Internal-Carriers n2+an..30

n2+an..30

n2+an..30

n2+an..30

Internal-Carriers

Intra-Company (Internal)

Intra-Company (Internal)

Internal n2+an..30

n2+an..30

n2+an..30

n2+an..30

(*)To indicate only year and month, DD must be filled with “00”

(**) Plus one digit for length indication

(***) Plus one digit for decimal point indication

Data Value Representation: a - alphabetic characters an - alpha-numeric characters an..3 - up to 3 alpha-numeric characters n - numeric characters n3 - 3 numeric characters, fixed length n..3 - up to 3 numeric characters

US Postnet Barcodes

The LineJet printer can print barcodes in three different formats. The default,

24 bars per inch, uses the same syntax as the other barcodes. It is suggested to use the ESC*Z0Q command to disable placement of a header on postal barcodes. The LineJet printer will also print barcodes using the 256X format for 20 and 22.5 bars per inch postal barcodes. See the section on 256X - US

Barcodes for more details. LineJet style Postnet barcodes will automatically generate the check digit if it is not present. The 256X-compatibility barcodes require the host to generate the check digit. If a non-valid character or string length is used, a blank non-readable bar code will be printed; non-valid characters are not substituted or deleted. The width of the printed bar code is not variable and is 1.33 (5 digit), 2.17 (9 digit), or 2.59 (11 digit) inches.

43

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

256X US POSTNET BAR CODE

The US POSTNET Bar Code is an HP character set which meets the US

Postal Office specifications for Postnet bar coding, including the latest

Delivery Point Bar Code, or DPBC.

US POSTNET Bar Codes print at 4.0 cpi (20 bars per inch) and 11.3 cpi (22.5 bars per inch). Both bar codes are printed by replacing normal printable characters with vertical bars. Both options use different characters to represent the desired bar codes, as a result the methods by which they are produced are incompatible.

11.3 CPI (22.5 Bars per inch) US POSTNET BAR CODE

FONT SELECTION

You may select either of the US POSTNET character sets from either the front panel or through escape sequences. (Refer to the User’s Guide for details on front panel menus.)

The following escape sequence will configure the 11.3 cpi POSTNET BAR

CODE as a secondary font:

ESC)1KESC)s11.3H

The sequence above sets the secondary font symbol set to 11.3 cpi

POSTNET BAR CODE, and sets the pitch to 11.3 cpi. Once the Secondary character set is configured for 11.3 cpi Postnet Bar Codes, the Shift Out command can be used to activate the bar codes:

Shift Out: hex 0E

After the bar code is printed, the normal print mode is activated by using the

Shift In command:

Shift In: hex 0F

Note It is recommended setting the US POSTNET Bar Code character set as the secondary set, with the normal operation mode as the primary font.

Printing 11.3 CPI US POSTNET Bar Code Information

The US POSTNET BAR CODES represent digits 0 - 9 with five vertical bars.

Each digit consists of two long bars (1’s) and three short bars (0’s). The

Delivery Point Bar Code font is designed to be printed only at 11.3 cpi or 22.5 bars per inch. A Delivery Point Bar Code is an eleven digit postal code. (For five or nine postal bar codes, use the 4.0 cpi US POSTNET Bar Code.)

The eleven numeric characters are : ZIP + 4 + 2

To make the bar code scannable, you must add a check digit and frame bars.

The check digit is calculated by adding all of the digits and subtracting the sum from the next highest multiple of ten. Consequently, the sum of the eleven digits, and the check digit, will be an even multiple of ten.

44

US Postnet Barcodes

The printer does not calculate the check digit, or automatically generate frame bars. They must be generated by the computer resident software, and sent to the printer. To do this, it is necessary to design a program that will convert a pair of digits into ten vertical bars..

Frame

Bar 0 1 2 3 4 - 5 6 7 8 - 9 1

Correction

Digit

Frame

Bar

1 11000 00011 00101 00110 01001 01010 01100 10001 10010 10100 00011 00101 1

00 =

= \ (5C/h)

01 =

= ~ (7E/h) = } (7D/h)

10 =

= { (7B/h)

11 =

= ‘ (60/h) = ^ (5E/h)

Note Each digit is five bars, with each printable character being two bars. Thus, 2 1/2 characters are needed to print one digit.

Perform the following steps to determine the check digit for 45834-8844-70:

1.

Calculate the check digit:

Add the digits of the postal code: 4+5+8+3+4+8+8+4+4+7+0 = 51

2.

Subtract from the next highest multiple of ten:

60-51 = 9

The check digit is 9.

The barcode can be created one of two ways. The first, uses the frame bars as separate characters, the second “links” the frame bars to the first and last characters.

Frame Bar:

Characters “45”:

Characters “83”:

Characters “48”:

Characters “84”:

Characters “47”:

Characters “09”:

Frame Bar:

Text sent to Printer:

\

Method 1:

}~{{{

{}~}{

}~`~{

{}~{}

}~}~}

`~}}~

^

(1)

(01001 01010)

(10010 00110)

(01001 10010)

(10010 01001)

(01001 10001)

(11000 10100)

(1)

SO\}~{{{{}~}{}~`~{{}~{}}~}~}`~}}~^SI

45

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

Frame Bar & “4”:

Characters “58”:

Characters “34”:

Characters “88”:

Characters “44”:

Characters “79”:

“9” & Frame Bar:

Text sent to Printer:

Method 2:

{{}

}}}~{

~`~{}

{}}~{

}~{{}

{~`{~

{{}

(1 01001)

(01010 10010)

(00110 01001)

(10010 10010)

(01001 01001)

(10001 11000)

(10100 1)

SO{{}}}}~{~`~{}{}}~{}~{{}{~`{~{{}SI

For both examples, SO = Shift Out (hex 0E), and SI = Shift In (hex 0F).

4.0 CPI (20 Bars per inch) US POSTNET Bar Code

FONT SELECTION

You may select either of the US POSTNET character sets from the front panel, or through escape sequences. (Refer to your User’s Guide for details on front panel menus.)

The following escape sequence will configure the 4.0 cpi POSTNET BAR

CODE as a secondary font:

ESC)0K

ESC)0KESC)s4.0H

(Compatible with 256XC series printers.)

(Compatible with C235XA series printers.)

The sequence above sets the secondary font symbol set to 4.0 cpi POSTNET

BAR CODE, and sets the pitch to 4.0 cpi. Once the Secondary character set is configured for 4.0 CPI Postnet Bar Codes, the Shift Out command can be used to activate the bar codes:

Shift Out: hex 0E

After the bar code is printed, the normal print mode is activated by using the

Shift In command:

Shift In: hex 0F

Note It is recommended setting the US POSTNET Bar Code character set as the secondary set, with the normal operation mode as the primary font.

Perform the following steps to determine the check digit for 45834-8844-70:

1.

Calculate the check digit:

Add the digits of the postal code: 4+5+8+3+4+8+8+4+4+7+0 = 51

2.

Subtract from the next highest multiple of ten:

60 - 51 = 9

The check digit is 9.

3.

Text sent to Printer:

SONUL458348844709.SI

SO = Shift Out (hex 0E)

NUL = Nul (hex 00)

SI = Shift In (hex 0F)

46

Character Density Selection

Character Density Selection

(PCL Level III)

Standard-density print, high-density print, and high-speed draft printing can be specified using the following escape sequences:

Primary Selection

ESC(s0Q Select Standard-Density (12 x 9 dot matrix, 120 x 72 dpi) for the primary font

ESC(s1Q Select High-Density (18 x 12 dot matrix, 180 x 96 dpi) for the primary font

ESC(s-1Q Select High-speed Draft Printing (12 x 6 dot matrix, 120 x 48 dpi) for the primary font

Secondary Selection

ESC)s0Q Select Standard-Density (12 x 9 dot matrix, 120 x 72 dpi) for the secondary font

ESC)s1Q Select High-Density (18 x 12 dot matrix, 180 x 96 dpi) for the secondary font

ESC)s-1Q Select High-speed Draft Printing (12 x 6 dot matrix, 120 x 48 dpi) for the secondary font

The default density is that of the default font specified from the control panel.

If the symbol set selected is not available in the requested density, the printer will print blank space. However, OCR-A, OCR-B, and Postal Barcodes force density changes to ensure scanability.

When draft printing is selected, the printer prints less dots vertically (5 dots).

This reduction in dots results in an increase in print speed of up to 30%.

ESC(0UESC(s10h0s-1Q

To cue high-speed draft with Roman Extension:

ESC(0EESC(s10h0s-1Q

The following table lists all the Symbol Sets available to the PCL II Emulation.

Each Symbol Set is followed by its selection Code, and the Densities(Pitches) that it is available in. With the exception of OCR-A and OCR-B, selecting a symbol set in a Density combination not listed in the chart below will result in spaces being printed in place of the desired character.

47

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

Name

Line Draw Set

ISO Den/Nor

Roman Ext

ISO UK

ISO France

ISO German

Hebrew

Japanese ASCII

Katakana

Block Char

OCR-A

OCR-B

ISO Swe/Fin

Roman-8

Turkish-8

Arab-8

Cyrillic

PC858 MtLi

MCText

Roman-9

Latin 9

Win 3.0 Latin-1

Japan Postnet

Katakana Post

ASCII

Math Symb

ISO Spain

ISO Italian

ISO Portugu

Latin-1

Latin-2

Latin-5

Table 7. Available Symbol Sets

Code

0H

0K

1K

1L

0O

1O

0S

0B/0L

0D

0E

1E

0F

0G

4U

9N

9U n/a

8U

8T

8V

8R

13U

12J n/a

0U

0A/0M

1S

0I

4S

0N

2N

5N

Density (Pitches)

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS(5,10) DP NLQ

HS(5,10) DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ n/a n/a

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

DP

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

DP(5,10) NLQ(5,10)

DP

OCRA(10)

OCRB(10)

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

48

Character Density Selection

Table 7. Available Symbol Sets (continued)

Name

Latin-6

Baltic

PC-8 DanNor

PC-8 Cd 437

PC-850 MtLi

PC-851 LtGk

PC-852 Latin2

PC Turkish

PC Hebrew

PC Lat/Ara

PC Cyrillic

Win3.1 Lat1

Win3.1 Lat-2

Win3.1 Lat-5

Math-8

PS Math

Greek 7

Postnet 4

Postnet 11.3

Greek-8

Hebrew-8

Katakana-8

DEC 256 Greek

ELOT 928 Greek

Greek 3

ABY Greek

ABG Greek

ELOT 927 Greek

Greek 437

Greek 8859-7

5T

8M

5M

12N

9T

15H

10V

3R

19U

9E

15Y

1K

8G

6N

19L

11U

10U

12U

12G

17U n/a n/a n/a n/a

8H

8K n/a n/a n/a n/a

Code Density (Pitches)

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS(5,10) DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

DP NLQ

DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

NLQ(4)

NLQ(11.25)

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

DP(5,10) NLQ(5,10)

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

HS DP NLQ

Note All fonts support the following pitches unless otherwise noted: (5, 10, 12, 13.3, 15, 16.67, 20).

49

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

Character Font Selection

The printer can print several different character sets (fonts). By performing a printer self-test, you can see which fonts are installed in your printer. You may specify any of these fonts from an application. On the self-test printout, each available character font is printed along with a parameter number to the left of the printed font.

Note Many earlier models of HP printers could not select certain combinations of character sets. Your new LineJet printer does not have this limitation. The new LineJet printer produces different characters than the previous models, and your application may be requesting the old character set.

You will need to modify your application's settings to prevent it from selecting the old character set.

There are two ways to select a font from those available:

• By entering the parameter number via the control panel (function 1 = primary character set; function 2 = secondary character set)

• By specifying the attributes of the desired fonts using escape sequences.

The list below contains the font attributes, listed in order of descending priority:

• Symbol Set (ASCII, Roman-8, Line Draw, etc.)

• Pitch (10,12,13.3,15,16.67, 20)

• Style (Upright/Italic)

• Density (High-Speed, Near Letter Quality)

The attributes are specified for both primary and secondary fonts so that you may switch between the primary and secondary fonts using the Shift Out (SO) and Shift In (SI) control codes. Notice that the only difference between the primary and secondary font escape sequences is the direction of the parentheses. The left parenthesis “(“ is used for primary fonts and the right parenthesis “)” for secondary. Upon receiving these font attribute commands, the printer selects the best fitting font from those available.

It is not necessary to specify all four font attributes when selecting a font. If any of the attributes are not specified, the printer defaults to those attributes last specified (or, if none have been specified, from the control panel default font). For example, if you wish to select a font without selecting a print pitch, the print pitch last specified will be in effect. If you had not previously specified a print pitch, the printer will use the print pitch of the default font that was last specified from the control panel (provided that the particular symbol set selected is available in the current pitch).

The escape sequences used for specifying the character font attributes are explained in the following paragraphs.

50

Character Font Selection

Symbol Set Selection

The printer allows you to select a symbol set. A symbol set is a set of characters that are mapped to certain locations in the printer’s memory.

Symbol sets differ from one another in the characters contained in the set and in their locations within memory. The default symbol set is that of the default font specified from the control panel.

The following escape sequences are used to specify the primary and secondary symbol sets:

ESC( ID Select symbol set for primary character font

ESC) ID Select symbol set for secondary character font

Table 8 lists the ID’s needed to select each symbol set. For example, to select the Roman-8 symbol set for the primary font, you would send the ESC(8U escape sequence. To select OCR-B for the secondary font, you would send

ESC)1O to the printer.

An ASCII symbol set table is provided in Appendix A.

Note Any number of fonts may be printed on each line, but to do this, each font must be the same pitch and typeface. That is, only one print pitch, or typeface is allowed per line.

Symbol Set

Name

Roman-8*

Turkish-8

Arab-8

Cyrillic-8

ASCII

Math Symbol

Line Draw Set

ISO Den/Nor

Roman Ext Char

ISO UK

ISO France

ISO German

Hebrew

Japan ASCII

Katakana

0H

0K

1K

0E

1E

0F

0G

8U

8T

8V

8R

0U

0A or 0M

0B or 0L

0D

ID

7-Bit

7-Bit

7-Bit

7-Bit

8-Bit

7-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

7-Bit

7-Bit

7-Bit

7-Bit

Table 8. Symbol Set Selection

Classification

Printable in hex

80-9F Range

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

Mode

51

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

Symbol Set

Name

PC-852 Lat2

PC Turkish

PC Hebrew

PC Lat/Ara

PC Cyrillic

Win 3.1 Latin-1

Win 3.1 Latin-2

Win 3.1 Latin-5

Math-8

PS Math

Greek-7

Postnet 4

Postnet 11.25

Greek-8

Hebrew-8

Katakana-8

Block Char

OCR-A

1L

0O

OCR-B 1O

ISO Swe/Fin 0S

ISO Spain

ISO Italian

ISO Portugu

Latin-1

1S

0I

4S

0N

Latin-2

Latin-5

Latin-6

Baltic

PC-8 DanNor

PC-8 Code 437

PC-850 MtLi

PC-851 Lt/Gk

11U

10U

12U

12G

2N

5N

6N

19L

1K

8G

8H

8K

8M

5M

12N

15Y / 0K

3R

19U

9E

5T

17U

9T

15H

10V

ID

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

7-Bit

7-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

8-Bit

7-Bit

7-Bit

7-Bit

7-Bit

7-Bit

7-Bit

7-Bit

8-Bit

Table 8. Symbol Set Selection (continued)

Classification

Printable in hex

80-9F Range

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

Mode

52

Character Overstrike

Symbol Set

Name

DEC 256 Greek

ELOT 928 Greek

Greek 3

ABY Greek

ABG Greek

ELOT 927 Greek

Greek 437

Greek 8859-7 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Table 8. Symbol Set Selection (continued)

ID Classification n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Printable in hex

80-9F Range n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Mode

Character Overstrike

To create special symbols and underline selected portions of your output, one character (maximum) may be printed over another on a character-bycharacter or line-by-line basis.

A character overstrike is accomplished using either the backspace control code or a carriage return with no line feed. The overstrike print line will be held in the print buffer and will be merged with the next line to form a single printed line with superimposed characters.

Attempting to print more than two characters in any one print location will result in a loss of data integrity. (Only the last two characters received will be retained.)

When the automatic underlining enhancement is used (ESC&dD), the underlined character is not considered an overstrike character. Therefore, if the underlining enhancement was used to underline a character, another character could still be printed over it without risking data loss.

Character Style Selection

The printer has two types of character styles: upright and italic. The following escape sequences select either the upright or the italic print style for the primary and secondary character fonts:

ESC(s0S Selects the upright style for the primary font

ESC(s1S Selects the italic style for the primary font

ESC)s0S Selects the upright style for the secondary font

ESC)s1S Selects the italic style for the secondary font

Italics cannot be selected or saved from the control panel. The printer will default to the upright style when the printer is first powered on. Changing emulations, loading a configuration, or sending the ESCE command to the printer will cancel the italic style for the primary and secondary fonts.

53

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

Cursor Control

Absolute and relative cursor control are provided for the printer. Cursor moves are made in the current active pitch and current active vertical spacing. The following escape sequences perform these functions:

Absolute Row ESC&a#R

Move cursor to absolute row # (where # is an unsigned integer)

Absolute Column

Relative Row

ESC&a#C

Move cursor to absolute column # (where # is an unsigned integer)

ESC&a[+#]R

Move cursor to relative row # from current position

(where # is a signed [+ only] integer)

Relative Column ESC&a[+/-#]C

Move cursor to relative column # from current position

(where # is a signed [+/-] integer)

Note A plus (+) or minus (-) sign in front of the value indicates that the new position is relative to the current active position. A

(+) sign means the new position is to the right (horizontal) or that paper motion is forward (vertical). A (-) sign means that the new cursor position is to the left of the current active position. The printer does not perform reverse paper motion.

The vertical cursor positioning commands move the current active position to the same column on a new line; the vertical movement is based on the active vertical spacing.

The horizontal cursor positioning commands move the current active position to a new column on the same line; the horizontal movement is based on the active horizontal print pitch.

The first column/row within a line/page is column/row zero. Therefore, the upper left-most position is position (0,0). This escape sequence ignores margins and can therefore be used to set the current active position to any location within the printer’s physical limits. If a request is made for a location outside the printer’s physical limits, the current active position is moved to the appropriate limit.

54

Display Functions Mode

Display Functions Mode

(PCL Level I)

The display functions mode can be entered using the ESCY sequence. In the display functions mode, the printer prints representative character symbols for the control code characters instead of actually executing the control characters. In this mode, the carriage return (CR) control character will cause a CR symbol to be printed and an actual carriage return and line feed to be performed. The display functions mode can be exited by sending an ESCZ sequence. The ESCZ will be printed before the mode is terminated. Display

Functions Mode “off” is the printer default state.

Note The system driver may only allow the printer to print one line in the display functions mode.

When the printer is printing in high-speed draft mode, display function characters will not be printed.

Horizontal Margin Selection

Absolute left and right margin selection is accomplished using the following escape sequences:

ESC&a[ print position ]L Set left margin

ESC&a[ print position ]M Set right margin

The print position specified indicates a decimal number in the range 0 through

131 @ 10cpi (0 - 65 for Double-size, 5 cpi, 0-219 for compressed, 16.67 cpi).

The print position represents the column using the print pitch active when the margin is set. For example, if the character pitch is 10 characters/inch and the left margin is set to column 20, the left margin will be two inches from the left physical limit of the printer. If the pitch is then changed to 5 characters/inch, the left margin would still be in the same logical position, but column 20 would be four inches from the left physical limit of the printer instead of 2 inches.

Margins can be set at any column, regardless of the present printing position.

If the new margin selected is to the right of the current print position, then the new setting takes effect immediately. If the new margin setting is to the left of the current print position, then the new setting does not take effect until the cursor is reset to zero.

The first column within a line is designated column 0. If a print position greater

(or less) than the printer's physical limit is specified, the right (or left) margin will be set to the limits of the printer. Power-on and set the margins to the maximum limits.

Commands are ignored if the result would place the left margin to the right of the right margin. The only way to move the current active position outside the margins is by using the escape sequences for horizontal cursor control.

55

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

To release the right margin use one of the following escape sequences:

ESC&a132M for 10 cpi

ESC&a158M for 12 cpi

ESC&a175M for 13.3 cpi

ESC&a198M for 15 cpi

ESC&a220M for 16.7 cpi

The ESC9 command resets the left and right margins. The left margin is set to the left edge of the logical page (column 0) and the right margin is set to the right edge of the logical page.

Line Spacing

Vertical line spacing of 6 or 8 LPI (lines per inch) can be selected either from the control panel or remotely using the ESC&l[6 or 8]D sequence. When the printer is reset, the vertical line spacing is as set from the control panel. If a parameter other than 6 or 8 is entered, the command is ignored and no line spacing change is made.

Note Changing the line spacing causes the standard VFC table to be recalculated.

Logical Page Length Selection

(PCL Level II)

Two page length definitions exist for the printer; physical page length and logical page length. The physical page length is the length of the paper in inches. The printer also allows you to set page length in lines per page.

The logical page length is that which is received via an escape sequence and is calculated in lines per page. Therefore, one physical page can contain more than one logical page.

The default logical page length is the physical page length. In most cases, formatting problems can be solved by changing the physical page length and using the default logical page length.

Note When loading a different size of form in the printer, it is usually best to have the operator set the physical page (from the control panel) to the actual size of the paper rather than programmatically setting the logical page to match the length of the new form (and leaving the physical page length at its previous value). This practice avoids problems if a paper-out occurs.

56

Perforation Skip Mode

The logical page length is set using the ESC&l[1-128]P sequence, where the value field (1-128) is the desired number of lines per page. This command also defaults the text length to be one inch less than the logical page length, unless the logical page length is one inch or less, in which case the text length is set equal to the page length. Requests for a page length of zero cause the logical page length to equal the physical page length. Requests for a page length greater than 128 are ignored.

Although the logical page is specified in number of lines, this number represents the space occupied by that many lines (using the line spacing that was effective at the time the logical page length was specified). Therefore, if a logical page length of 66 lines is specified and the line spacing is currently at 6

LPI, the logical page length is 11 inches. If the line spacing is changed (to 8

LPI) in the middle of the page, the actual length of the page would still be 11 inches but the number of print lines would be 88 (8 LPI x 11 inches).

Before changing the page length, it is recommended that a VFC select of channel 0 be performed. This will bring the printer to the top of the next physical page (unless the printer is already at the top of the physical page).

Changing the logical page length changes the standard VFC table.

Perforation Skip Mode

(PCL Level I)

When perforation skip is enabled, the printer skips to the next Top of Form if the bottom margin is entered following a line feed. The following escape sequences enable and disable the perforation skip mode:

ESC&l1L

ESC&l0L

Enable perforation skip mode

Disable perforation skip mode

If a programmable VFC is enabled, the end of text is determined by the first occurrence of channel 2. If channel 2 is completely clear, the end of text is the end of the page (that is, there is no perforation region). The text length defaults to one inch less than the logical page length unless the text length has been specified with the ESC&l[1-128]F sequence.

Perforation skip mode defaults as configured from the control panel.

When the perforation skip mode is disabled, the printer will print in the margin space below the desired bottom of text. This can be avoided if a VFC select to the next Top of Form is performed immediately following the last desired line of text on the page.

Note Many systems perform an automatic page eject which overrides the printer’s perforation skip mode. If the user desires to print in the perforation skip region, the system’s automatic page eject must be disabled.

57

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

0

2

4

8**

Print Mode Selection

The standard, compressed, and double-high/double-wide print modes are selected using the ESC&l[0,2,4,8]S sequence as shown in the following table.

This escape sequence affects both the primary and secondary character fonts. The default print mode is that of the default font specified from the control panel. Only one print mode is allowed per line.

Table 9. Print Mode Selection

Mode

Horizontal Pitch

(in characters/inch)

10.0

16.67

12.0

5.0

6 or 8

6 or 8

6 or 8

3 or 4

Vertical Pitch

(in lines/inch)*

* Dependent on current line spacing.

** Double high/double wide character set selection.

Print Pitch Selection

Print pitch is specified using the following escape sequences:

ESC(s[5,10,12,13.3,15,16.7,20.0]H

Select print pitch for primary character font

ESC)s[5,10,12,13.3,15,16.7,20.0]H

Select print pitch for secondary character font

When specifying a pitch, if no font with the exact size specified is available, the next larger pitch will be designated. If a larger pitch does not exist, the pitch will be set to 16.67. Only one pitch per line may be selected. The default print pitch is that of the primary font specified from the control panel.

Note Refer to the LineJet Printers: User’s Guide to see which pitches are available for different symbol set and typeface combinations.

Printing in the Hex 80 through Hex FF Region

The LineJet printer exhibits different behaviors as it processes characters in the hex 80 through FF range. Behavior is based upon the symbol set of the active font. If the symbol set of the active font is 7-bit, characters in the hex 80 through FF range will be ignored. If the symbol set is 8-bit, the printer will attempt to process the characters.

There are two different types of 8-bit sets. Some have characters that are printable in the hex 80 through 9F region, while others do not. (See Table 8).

58

PTX Linefeed

If the active symbol set does not have printables in the hex 80 through 9F range, the characters are ignored.

To determine symbol set properties, perform a symbol set print from the PCL menu. 7-bit sets print only one line of characters, while 8-bit sets print two. 8bit sets, with printables in the hex 80 through 9F range, print characters in the space below the control code on the first line. Those without printables in that range leave the area under the control codes blank.

PTX Linefeed

Determines the vertical text alignment when a Linefeed command is sent.

ESC*t1L Enabled

ESC*t0L Disabled

When PTX Linefeed is enabled, the Linefeed moves to the next line as calculated from the Top of Form position, thereby retaining vertical text alignment. When printing graphics or bar codes, you may want to set the PTX

Linefeed parameter to Enable to maintain text alignment.

When PTX Linefeed is disabled, the Linefeed is to be performed as calculated from the bottom of the graphics or barcode, thereby disrupting the vertical text alignment.

See Figure 1 for an example of this parameter enabled and disabled.

LINE 1

LINE 2

LINE 3

PTX Linefeed Enabled

Linefeed

LINE 1

LINE 2

LINE 3

PTX Linefeed Disabled

Linefeed

Figure 1. PTX Linefeed

59

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

Programmable Reset

The programmable reset escape sequence (ESCE) causes the printer to eject paper to the top-of-form (position 0,0) if not already at top-of-form. This command resets all current printer configuration values to the following states. The printer remains on-line after a programmable reset. When the printer is reset, it is set to a known state as follows:

• Primary and secondary character sets (fonts) as configured from the control panel.

• Vertical line spacing (6/8 LPI) as configured from the control panel.

• Paper moves to the next Top of Form position (if not currently at Top of

Form).

• Data buffer is printed and then the buffer is cleared.

• Standard VFC channel assignments selected as defined by physical page length.

• Margins set at maximum limits and/or Left margin set at first column (0).

• Physical page length remains as configured from the control panel.

• Logical page length = physical page length

• Text length = logical page length minus one inch

• All character font attributes (symbol set, pitch, style, and density) default to the character font configured from the control panel.

• Display functions off and Underline enhance disabled.

• Perforation skip mode as configured from the control panel.

• Enable/Disable Label Card as configured from control panel.

• Printronix linefeed emulation as configured from control panel.

• Raster graphics horizontal resolution as configured from the control panel. Vertical resolution set to 72 dots per inch.

Programmable VFC

Programmable VFC allows the user to specify paper movement information other than the standard VFC definitions shown in Table 12. VFC information is stored in the memory (RAM) table just as the standard VFC is, only the bytes of information are loaded into RAM using the following escape sequence:

ESC&l[ byte count ]W[ VFC data ]

The byte count parameter specifies the number (in decimal 0 - 255) of VFC data bytes to expect immediately following the termination of the escape sequence.

Note An even byte count must be indicated. If an odd byte count is indicated, the VFC table in RAM will not be overwritten and the data bytes following the ESC sequence are read and discarded.

60

Programmable VFC

VFC data is the binary data which is loaded into the VFC table in RAM. These

8-bit bytes are sent in the following order following the ESC sequence terminator: the most significant byte of the first word followed by the least significant byte of the first word, followed by the most significant byte of the second word, etc. The most significant bit of each word is channel 16 and the least significant bit of each word is channel 1.

VFC Data = (MS byte) (LS byte) (MS byte) (LS byte) . . .

(word 1 = line 1) (word 2 = line 2) . . .

Once the VFC has been loaded into the RAM table, the VFC channels are selected using the ESC&l[0 through 16]V sequence in the same manner as the standard VFC. The standard and programmable VFC both use the same table in RAM. Resetting the printer causes the standard VFC to be recalculated using the current page and text (form) length and a new table to be overwritten in RAM. The VFC table is also recalculated when the line spacing, text length, or page length changes.

Note If the I/O is configured for 7 bit data, channels 8 and 16 cannot be downloaded with confidence since the eighth bit is used for the communication protocol. Selecting channels 8 or 16 for 7 bit data is not recommended.

Special VFC Considerations

Before loading a VFC table, it is recommended that a VFC select of channel 0 be performed. This will bring the printer to the top of the physical page.

When a programmed VFC is loaded into RAM, the logical page length is automatically calculated using the following formula:

Logical Page Length (in number of lines) = byte count /2

The example on page 67 shows a VFC table which uses “standard” VFC definitions and also illustrates a programmable VFC.

Example: Defining a 3.5 inch form at six lines per inch.

1 inch = 6 lines x 3.5 inches = 21 lines

61

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

Programmable VFC Using PCL

Programmable VFC’s using PCL seem to cause a lot of problems and misunderstandings. Most of the misunderstanding concerns the use of the escape sequence used to set the VFC file. This escape sequence is used to override the default VFC of the printer. This escape sequence can be hardcoded into a program or ASCII file.

VFC’s are best understood by reviewing an actual example of how to implement them. For this discussion, the example consists of a 3.5 inch form at six lines per inch with several different channels defined for use on the form to be printed.

1 inch = 6 lines per inch x 3.5 inches = 21 lines; therefore this would be a 21 line form.

Note The TEXT LENGTH command could be used in conjunction with the standard VFC and accomplish the above requirements. The assumption is there are reasons to use a customized VFC; this example has been simplified for clarification purposes.

First, establish the VFC length: with a 3.5” form and 6 LPI print, we have 21 potential lines of print (3.5 x 6 = 21). Refer to the following figure for an example of the desired finished output.

There are many methods to accomplish this task. The simplest way is to provide a “1” in CH3 (Channel 3) for all possible print lines and simply call

CH3 for each line (including blank lines). This is called “line counting” and leaves the burden of positioning with the programmer (adding or deleting a line causes an adjustment elsewhere to be made).

EXAMPLE FORM

Line 1

Line 2

Line 3

Line 4

Line 5

Line 6

Line 7

Line 8

Line 9

Line 10

Line 11

Line 12

Line 13

Line 14

Line 15

Line 16

Line 17

Line 18

Line 19

Line 20

Line 21

Company name

Street address

Opening line

Body

Body

Body

Closing line

P.S. line

62

Programmable VFC

A second method involves only providing a “1” in CH3 where print will occur.

The programmer then simply calls CH3 and the blank lines are skipped.

There still is no flexibility for adding or deleting lines without VFC modification, but line counting is minimized.

A third method involves assigning VFC channels to each section of the letter and performing a call to CH3 within each section. To do this, the manufacturer highly recommends following these guidelines:

• CH1 should always define TOF and must be present for a valid load.

• CH2 should always define BOF allowing for vertical margin (if any) and must be present for valid paper out conditions.

• CH3 should be present for any potential print line except in the vertical margin area (if any).

For this example, CH1 will occur at line 1 and is aligned with the Company

Name. We will arbitrarily assign CH4 to occur at line 7 (Opening Line), CH5 to occur at line 10 (Body), CH6 to occur on line 17 (Closing Line) and CH7 to occur on line 20 (P.S. Line).

With the above channel assignments in mind, the programmer would call CH1 to begin the letter. After printing the name and address (using calls to CH3 to

“move” to each line) the programmer would call CH4 to skip to line 7 and print the opening line. Next, a call is made to CH5 to skip to line 10 and print the body, CH6 to print the closing and CH7 to print the P.S. line. This gives each section flexibility by allowing variable sizes, limited by the physical room available before interfering with the next section and avoiding the drudgery of line count.

The above VFC would look like:

Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Line 1

Line 2

Line 3

Line 4

Line 5

Line 6

Line 7

Line 8

Line 9

Line 10

Line 11

Line 12

Line 13

Line 14

Line 15

Line 16

Line 17

Line 18

Line 19

Line 20

Line 21

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1 1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Note A “1” corresponds to a hole punched in a physical paper tape.

63

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

Notice that for each line channel 3 is selected, this would select a single space advance. A 1 could be placed in any or all other channels and the VFC would still be valid since the printer will only look at the channel selected and advance to the next line that contained a 1 in that channel. For example, if the printer was on line 2 and channel 7 was selected, the printer would advance or slew down to line 20 which is the first line where there is a “1” in channel 7.

The next step would be to convert the above VFC definition into the escape sequence format. The VFC data portion of the escape sequence reverses the order of the channels. Once reversed, the 16 bits are then divided into two, 8bit bytes, with channel 16 being the Most Significant Bit (MSB) of the word and channel 1 the Least Significant Bit (LSB) of the word. Refer to Table 10.

Since the escape sequence requires the VFC data to be in ASCII format this binary data must be converted to ASCII. As in our example, many characters may convert to “unprintable” ASCII characters (below ASCII OCTAL 037).

Refer to the ASCII Symbol Set chart in Appendix A. Entering unprintable data can be done in several ways:

The easiest and preferred method involves using “dummy” VFC channels to cause the converted character to become a printable one. For example, always have bit 7 and bit 15 a “1”, thus adding %100 to the unprintable character, and eliminating the confusion of entering unprintable data. Do not

“call” the corresponding channel bit 7 or 15 or else improper spacing will occur.

If the VFC channels that bits 7 and 15 represent must be used, these unprintable characters must be manipulated for data entry. In most cases, this can be dealt with by using the DISPLAY FUNCTIONS mode of your terminal.

Type in the “ESC&l[ byte count ]W” followed by the ASCII characters using the

CONTROL key with the corresponding letter. (Since the CONTROL key subtracts %100 (100 OCTAL) simply add %100 to the “unprintable” character.

For example, 00000101 converts to %5, adding %100 gives you a %105 which is an E, therefore, pressing a CONTROL E gives the desired result.)

If your terminal doesn't have a DISPLAY FUNCTIONS mode, some EDITOR programs allow entering the OCTAL equivalents. Some editors do not allow the user to directly enter OCTAL numbers. In this case, a “dummy” character would be entered as the VFC data. Next, the EDITOR “CHANGE” command would be used to change the dummy character to the desired ASCII character. For example, place an “x” as a dummy character in the VFC data and use the CHANGE command to replace the “x” with an ASCII 01 (SOH character) by typing “CHANGEQ “x” to ‘01”. This would replace the “x” with the unprintable ASCII 01; your escape sequence would appear one character shorter without DISPLAY FUNCTIONS mode turned on.

This could also be accomplished by changing the specific column to the

ASCII character required. It is important to specify the starting and stopping column or the CHANGE command will act as a column INSERT. For example, if column 10 on line 2 is to be changed to an ASCII 04 you would type “CHANGEQ 10/10 TO '04 IN 2”.

Note The “ ' ” is the single quote and not the prime character.

64

Programmable VFC

The HP 3000 Workstation Configurator allows entering the VFC data in an initialization string. This is only applicable when using a printer with a serial interface and has some limitations. The most significant limitation is that the initialization string can contain only 120 formatted (compiled) characters. This limits use to VFCs of 57 lines or less (6 escape sequence characters + 114

VFC data characters = 120). Any other commands in the initialization string reduces this further. Space available in the initialization string data entry field

(three lines) is NOT an accurate indicator of the number of formatted characters; careful counting is necessary. Using VFC channels 8 and 16 is also not allowed due to a limitation of entering data with an octal value above

177.

There are several methods to enter data in the Workstation Configurator:

• Entering data as a decimal number, i.e. 13 for a carriage return.

• As an OCTAL number (one byte at a time) by preceding the number with the % sign.

• As a two or three character mnemonic such as BS or DC1 (see Appendix

B of the Workstation Configuration manual).

• By entering the control characters with the up-arrow or circumflex character preceding the character, i.e. a backspace would be an ^H.

• By entering the actual ASCII character within single quotes, i.e. ’A’ would equate to an OCTAL %101.

Each character entered, with the exception of multiple ASCII characters within the single quote, MUST BE separated by commas. An example would be

“ESC, '&16W', %101, 'ABC', BS, 13”.

Note Only one byte may be specified at a time in OCTAL, thus allowing a maximum of OCTAL 377 which would place a 1 in columns 1-8.

65

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

Line 1

Line 2

Line 3

Line 4

Line 5

Line 6

Line 7

Line 8

Table 10. Converting VFC Format to VFC Data

Most Significant Byte Least Significant Byte

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octal

MSB/LSB

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 %000%005

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 %000%004

ASCII

MSB/LSB

NulEnq

NulEot

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 %000%004 NulEot

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004

NulEot

NulEot

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 %000%014 NulFF

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot

Line 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot

Line 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 %000%024 NulDc4

Line 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot

Line 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot

Line 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot

Line 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot

Line 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot

Line 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot

Line 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 %000%044 Nul$

Line 18 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot

Line 19 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot

Line 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%104 NulD

Line 21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 %000%006 NulAck

@D

@D

@$*

@D

@D

@D*

@F

@D

@D

@D

@D

@L

@D

@D

@T

@D

@D

@D

@D

CTL

MSB/LSB

@E

@D

* DO NOT depress the Control Key on these BOLDFACE characters since they are printable characters.

This VFC data can now be entered into the escape sequence in an ASCII file or programmatically and be either embedded into the application or merged with the spool file.

66

Programmable VFC

Example VFC Data Entry Methods

The example escape sequence may be created while the DISPLAY

FUNCTIONS key has been enabled as shown below.*

Top of Form

Bottom of Form

Single Spacing

Double Spacing**

Triple Spacing**

Half Form

Quarter Form

Tenth Line

Bottom of Form

Bottom of Form - 1

Top of Form - 1

Top of Form

Seventh Line

Sixth Line

Fifth Line

Fourth Line

Line 1

Line 2

Line 3

Line 4

Line 5

Line 6

Line 7

Line 8

Line 9

Line 10

Line 11

Line 12

Line 13

Line 14

Line 15

Line 16

Line 17

Line 18

Line 19

Line 20

Line 21

Channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 1

1

1

1 1

1

1

1

1 1

1

1 1 1

1

1 1

1

1 1

1

1

1 1 1

1

1 1 1

1 1

1

1 1

1

1

1

1

1

1 1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

*This sample shows a 21-line VFC table at 6 LPI. The text ends at line 14, leaving 6 blank lines (one inch) at the bottom of the page.

**These channels cause a move to the next double/triple space line.

Press the CONTROL key before each letter of the VFC data except for the two BOLDFACE characters.

ESC&142W@E@D@D@D@D@D@L@D@D@T@D@D@D@D@D@

$@D@D@D@F

VFC data

This would display the corresponding ASCII character, i.e., the Nul for CTL

@.

67

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

Another method using a text editor would be to do a CHANGE command replacement to convert the characters to ASCII characters. This is shown as:

\ADD 1

1 ESC&142WabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzABCDEFGHIJ

2 //

\CHANGEQ 7/7 TO ’00

.

.

\CHANGEQ 8/8 TO ’05

\CHANGEQ 9/9 TO ’00

.

\CHANGEQ 48/48 TO ’06

This could also be input by not entering the letters, but simply changing the specific column to the desired ASCII character. In the above example the

“abc... HIJ” would not be entered and the CHANGE command would be used as follows:

.

.

.

\CHANGEQ 7 TO '00 \CHANGEQ 8 TO '05

An example for the Workstation Configurator might be input in several formats. An example showing the various formats is shown below:

ESC, '&142W' ,NUL,ENQ, '@, 'D, 00, 04, %0, %4, ....%0, %6

As you can see, the escape sequence for the Programmable VFC can be quite complicated. This should only be used after attempting to satisfy VFC requirements using the standard (computed) VFC and the TEXT and PAGE

LENGTH escape sequences.

The most common errors in successfully implementing the Programmable

VFC escape sequence usually involve improper VFC byte counting or attempting to manipulate “unprintable” characters and getting confused.

Converting these “unprintable” characters to printable ones is the easiest way to avoid data entry confusion.

Summary of Recommended Steps to Implement Programmable VFC

1.

Layout the required VFC in a standard channel 1-16 format.

2.

Reverse the resulting bit image so that channel 1 is now where channel

16 was and channel 16 is now where channel 1 was.

3.

Divide this 16 bit image into two 8-bit bytes.

4.

Decode these 8-bit bytes into ASCII characters using the chart in

Appendix A. If the corresponding decoded character is not a printable character (below %37), it is highly suggested to convert to one by using a

“dummy” channel (7 and/or 15).

5.

Enter these characters into the Programmable VFC escape sequence as the VFC data. This data MUST be an even byte count and is CASE

SENSITIVE (upper/lower). As in all escape sequences, do not include the brackets ([ ]); they are for clarification only.

68

Raster Graphics

6.

This escape sequence must be sent to the printer before the data by embedding in the application or as part of an initialization string. A programmable or hardware RESET will clear the VFC RAM causing the printer to return to the default VFC.

Note If either the RS-232E or the RS-422B interface is installed in the printer, the interface can be configured to have such things as STRIP NULLS AND DELETES. The Null and/or

Delete character could be used as valid characters, so the user must either combine other channels on the same line to generate another character, or not configure the printer to strip these characters. Another factor may be the use of 8-bit data. If the user desires to use channels 8 and 16, then 8-bit data must be configured. For more detail please refer to the

LineJet Printers: User’s Guide manual.

Raster Graphics

Graphics are sent to the printer using the following escape sequences:

ESC*t[70, 140]R Raster graphics resolution

ESC*r#L Horizontal raster graphics resolution

ESC*r#V Vertical raster graphics resolution

The ESC*r#L and ESC*r#V escape sequences allow you to set the horizontal and vertical raster graphics resolutions independently. Valid raster graphics resolutions are 70 DPI by 72 DPI, 140 DPI by 72 DPI, 70 DPI by 144 DPI, and

140 DPI by 144 DPI. The following table lists the graphics resolution and the corresponding escape sequence used to select that graphics resolution.

There are many different valid ways to select a given graphics resolution. The following table lists only one of the many valid ways.

The ESC*t#R escape sequence allows you to select a graphics resolution of either 70 x 72 dots per inch (default) or 140 x 144 dots per inch (high resolution). For example, to specify high-resolution, you would send the

ESC*t140R escape sequence to the printer. Using the standard resolution, the maximum amount of graphics data that can be printed is 115.5 bytes versus 231 bytes for high-resolution.

Table 11. Graphics Resolution

Horizontal DPI

70

140

70

140

72

Vertical DPI

72

144

144

Escape Sequence

ESC*r70l72V

ESC*r140l72V

ESC*r70l144V

ESC*r140l144V

ESC*rA Prepare for raster graphics (PCL Level I)

ESC*b[ # of bytes ] W[ binary data ] Raster data transfer (PCL Level I)

ESC*b[

ESC*rB

# of raster lines ]Y Move paper # number of raster lines

Raster graphics complete (PCL Level I)

69

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

The ESC*rA sequence informs the printer that a raster graphics dump is to follow the sequence. If the printer has received a partial line of ASCII data before this sequence is received, this escape sequence causes the ASCII data to be printed and a carriage return and line feed to be performed.

The ESC*b#W[ binary data ] sequence actually sends the raster data to the printer. This escape sequence must be sent for each raster line to be printed.

The # of bytes parameter is the decimal number of bytes of binary graphics data to be sent to the printer. The binary data consists of a 1 for every dot to be printed and a 0 for every blank space.

The ESC*b#Y escape sequence allows you to skip multiple adjacent blank lines. The # of raster lines parameter is the decimal number of blank raster lines to skip. The size of the blank raster line to be skipped is equivalent to the currently set vertical raster graphics resolution. The advantage of using this escape sequence over sending multiple raster data transfer escape sequences containing blank raster lines is the escape sequence is processed faster and the paper is moved faster.

The ESC*rB sequence informs the printer that all the raster data has been transferred.

The following example illustrates how to send three lines of raster graphics to the printer.

ESC*rAESC*b2WDc

ESC*rA Prepares printer for raster graphics

ESC*b2W Indicates two bytes of data to follow

D c

First byte of graphics data

Second byte of graphics data

ESC*b2WL@

ESC*b2W Indicates two bytes of data to follow

L First byte of graphics data

@ Second byte of graphics data

ESC*b2W$+ESC*rB

ESC*b2W Indicates two bytes of data to follow

$ First byte of graphics data

+

ESC*rB

Second byte of graphics data

Raster graphics complete

Many systems perform an automatic line feed after each line of data. The system’s automatic line feed must be suppressed or else the raster lines will not be adjacent to each other. A file equation which specifies the line length

(for example, RESC=-219) may be used to suppress the automatic line feed along with carriage control directives, such as “+”.

Graphics files must be raster graphics files in the format described here in order to print on the printer. To print vector graphics files, such as graphics files created for plotters, a vector-to-raster conversion must be performed on the data. (Vector-to-raster conversion is NOT a standard feature of the printer.) Text and graphics cannot mix on the same line due to grid conflicts.

Raster graphics use 8-bit data.

70

Self-test

Self-test

(PCL Level I)

ESCz prints the PCL-II configuration report, which shows available character sets, symbol sets, bar codes, etc.

Standard (Computed) VFC

The printer VFC uses the logical page and form length (text length) to calculate the distance to be skipped for each VFC channel. This information is then loaded into the printer's VFC “table.” The “table” is 16 channels wide and n lines long, where n is the logical page length in number of lines. A VFC channel contains a 1 in this table on every line it can access. If the VFC channel cannot access the line, a 0 is placed on that line for that channel. For example, to specify a skip to the next half form, a program would specify VFC channel 6. Notice in the sample on page 67 that 1's are placed in the table at the half form position (lines 1 and 9). Then, for example, if the printer has finished printing line 2 and channel 6 is selected, the paper will be advanced to line 9.

To use the standard VFC, perform the ESC&l[0-16]V sequence using the appropriate parameter number listed in Table 12.

Stroke Weight (Bold)

The Stroke Weight command designates the thickness of the strokes that compose the characters of a font.

ESC(s#B Primary stroke weight

ESC)s#B Secondary stroke weight

The value field (#) must be 0 for standard stroke weight, or 3 for bold stroke weight.

Switching Character Fonts

Character fonts can be accessed using the Shift In/Shift Out (SI/SO) control codes.

The SO (CTRL N) control code is sent to the printer to access the secondary font; the SI (CTRL O) control code is sent to select the primary font.

71

Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes

Text Length (Vertical Margin) Selection

(PCL Level II)

The length of a form within a logical page is set using the ESC&l[1-128]F sequence, where the number of lines desired (1-128) is specified. The first line of text is printed at the Top of Form position. The physical page length minus the text length defines the total vertical margin (top plus bottom margin) for the page.

If a text length of zero is received, the text length defaults to one inch less than the logical page length. The default text length, which is invoked any time the logical page length is changed, is one inch less than the logical page length. If the logical page length is one inch or less, the text length is set equal to the logical page length.

Transparent Print Data

This feature allows the printing of binary data which is required in certain applications. The escape sequence ESC&p[ # of bytes ]X enables the printer to print data as in the display functions mode, except that no control codes or escape sequences (including CR and ESCZ) are executed. The number specified in the value field is the exact number of bytes that will be interpreted as binary.

Underline Mode

The ESC&dD sequence enables the automatic underlining mode. In this mode, each printed character and space is underlined until the printer receives an ESC&d@ sequence. The underline enhancement is disabled in the default state. Underlining only affects forward horizontal movement such as SP (space), DATA, or forward horizontal cursor moves; reverse movements such as BS (backspace), CR (carriage return) and negative horizontal cursor moves are not affected.

72

Vertical Forms Control (VFC)

Vertical Forms Control (VFC)

Vertical forms control (VFC) is a feature which allows increased throughput by enabling the printer to skip to predetermined print locations. Key page locations, such as top of form, half form, double space, and triple space, are referred to as channels (0 through 16) and are stored in a VFC “table.”

The printer has both a standard (computed) VFC and a programmable VFC.

Note In most situations, the printer's standard (computed) VFC page length setting, as determined from the front panel, meets the application requirements. Refer to the LineJet

Printers: User’s Guide for information on setting the page length from the front panel.

Prefix

ESC&l

Table 12. VFC Default Channel Definitions

12

13

14

15

16

8

9

10

11

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

Parameter Terminator v/V

Explanation

*Conditional Top of Physical Page

Top of Form (first line of text)

Bottom of Form (last line of text)

Single spacing

**Double spacing

**Triple spacing

Half form

Quarter form

Tenth line

Bottom of Form

Bottom of Form - 1

Top of Form - 1

Top of Form

Seventh line

Sixth line

Fifth line

Fourth line

*All escape sequences except ESC&l0V refer to the logical page rather than the physical page. This escape sequence causes a skip to the top of the next physical page (unless already at top of page).

**These channels cause a move to the next double/triple space line, and therefore may not actually perform a double/triple space.

73

Chapter 2 HP 3000 Information

HP 3000 Information

This section contains information which is specific to HP 3000 users. It explains the use of the feature access and transparent modes, environment files, downloading VFC files, carriage control, perforation skip mode, and discusses recoverability.

Feature Access and Transparent Modes

During system device configuration, the LineJet printer is configured to default to either the transparent or feature access mode. In the transparent mode, the printer prints (but does not execute) all data including control codes and escape sequences. In the feature access mode, the supported control codes and escape sequences are executed. The user can access the non-default mode using either the FDEVICECONTROL intrinsic (for programs) or an environment file.

VFC Download with a Serial Interface

Typically, VFC download was only possible for 256X and HP 2300 Series printers with an HPIB interface using the CIPER driver. MPE V/E T-MIT and above support a software product called Workstation Configurator that allows serial printers to “download” VFC by placing the VFC escape sequence in an initialization string instead of embedding them within the application.

The process of downloading VFC using Workstation Configurator is different than when using an HPIB printer. Workstation Configurator has a utility that allows modification to two different files that allow for, among other things, setting initialization strings, flow control, and VFC. Workstation Configurator has a terminal type file that is used for certain functions and a VFC file that is used for setting the initialization strings and the VFC. These files are not in the same format as the HPIB VFC file and must be created using Workstation

Configurator.

When using the VFC file created using Workstation Configurator, the user must specify the terminal type file in the HP 3000 I/O Configuration, or by referencing it with the ENV parameter of the FILE statement. The

DOWNLOAD command will NOT operate in this configuration.

If the ENV parameter of the FILE statement is used, the associated terminal type file that has been configured with the printer will still be sent to the printer first and the terminal type file that has been specified with the ENV parameter will be sent NEXT. This does not create any problems, it just should be noted when using a datascope or analyzing a spool file.

74

Carriage-Control Directives

Carriage-Control Directives

The HP 3000 software drivers allow users to embed the following carriagecontrol directives in files:

ASCII SYMBOL

“ ”

“+”

“-”

“0”

“1”

“C”

CARRIAGE ACTION

Single space (with or without automatic page eject).

No space, return (next printing at column 1).

Triple space (without automatic page eject).

Double space (without automatic page eject).

Page eject (form feed). Selects VFC channel 1.

Sets single-space option, without automatic page eject (66 lines-per-page).

The carriage-control directive is placed in column 1 of the file and is executed

(but not printed) when the file is printed. When using this feature, all other characters placed in column 1 will be ignored (not printed).

When using the carriage-control directives, the application must use carriage control and [;CCTL] must be included in the file equation as shown in the following example:

:file [filename];dev=[device number];cctl

Graphics

When using graphics, the line feed generated by the driver must be suppressed or there will be 1/6” or 1/8” spacing between raster lines. One way to do this is to add a “+” to the front of the file as carriage control (the file equation must have “;CCTL.”)

Printing in the Perforation Skip Region

When using the HP 3000, an automatic page eject occurs when the perforation skip region is entered. There are three ways to avoid a page eject and allow printing in the perforation skip region:

• Set the text length = logical page length = physical page length on the front panel.

• Use carriage control with a “C” in column 1 (the application must use carriage control).

• Set the carriage control to null (no CR-LF at end of line) and programmatically add a CR-LF to the end of each record.

75

Chapter 2 HP 1000 Information

HP 1000 Information

The LineJet printer may be commanded into either the transparent or feature access mode. In the transparent mode, the printer prints (but does not execute) all data including control codes and escape sequences. In the feature access mode, the control codes and escape sequences are executed.

All configuration information is located in the DVC12 Graphics Printer Driver

Reference Manual (P/N 92068-90022). For HP 1000 A-Series information, refer to the Driver Reference Manual (P/N 92077-90011) and the RTE-A

System Design Manual (P/N 92077-90013). To set transparent mode with the

DVC12 driver, the following command can be used where LU is the logical unit address of the printer: --CN,LU,30B,20B

Downloading VFC

All information concerning downloading VFC files is contained in the DVC12

Graphics Printer Driver Reference Manual (P/N 92068-90022).

B-4 Carriage-Control Directives

The HP 1000 software drivers allow users to embed the following carriagecontrol directives in files:

ASCII SYMBOL

“ ”

“+” or “*”

“-”

“0”

“1”

CARRIAGE ACTION

Single space (with or without automatic page eject).

No space, return (next printing at column 1).

Triple space (without automatic page eject).

Double space (without automatic page eject).

Page eject (form feed). Selects VFC channel 1.

The carriage-control directive is placed in column 1 of the file and is executed

(but not printed) when the file is printed. When using this feature, all other characters placed in column 1 are ignored (not printed).

Perforation Skip Mode

To override the HP 1000 driver's automatic page eject, see the Control

Requests section of the DVC12 Graphics Printer Driver Reference Manual

(P/N 92068-90022).

76

3

P-Series Printer Emulation

Overview

This chapter describes the P-Series emulation host control codes.

“Emulation” refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language. A printer control language is the coding system used to convey, manipulate, and print data. It contains character codes and command sequences that configure the emulation. In this manual, the terms emulation, printer protocol, and printer control language are synonymous.

In the P-Series emulation mode, your printer can print files coded for the P-

Series printer control language. To select the P-Series emulation mode as the active printer emulation, select LinePrinter+ from the EMULATION menu and

P-Series from the Printer Protocol menu, as described in the User’s Guide.

The P-Series emulation provides many configurable parameters. The default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 13. You can modify the emulation parameter values in two ways:

The P-Series host control codes. An extensive set of P-Series control code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host computer via the host data stream. Most of this chapter is devoted to describing the P-Series control code commands.

The printer configuration menus. You can modify a subset of the P-

Series emulation parameters using the printer configuration menus, control panel keys and LCD, as described in the User’s Guide.

A parameter value set by a host control code generally overrides a value set from the printer’s control panel.

Note Configuration values selected from the menus or via host control codes can be saved to the printer’s NVRAM memory so that they will not be lost when you power off the printer or reset it to the factory defaults. The menu selection for saving a configuration to memory is described in the User’s Guide.

77

Chapter 3 Overview

P-Series Default Values and States

The factory settings for the P-Series emulation menu options are shown in

Table 13. Table 14 lists additional factory settings for parameters provided by the LinePrinter+ formatting menus. (The EMULATION menu options are described in the User’s Guide ). Host control codes can override many of the settings for these menu options.

Table 13. P-Series Default Settings

Characteristic

Control Code 06

Control Code 08

Define CR Code

Auto LF

Overstrike

Define LF Code

Select SFCC

EVFU Selected

Alternate Set 80-9F

Character Set

Primary Subset

Extended Subset

SFCC d Command

Default Setting

8.0 LPI

Elongated

CR = CR

Disable

Enable

LF = CR + LF

1

Enable

Control Code

IBM PC

ASCII (USA)

Code Page 437

Even Dot Plot

78

P-Series Default Values and States

Table 14. LinePrinter+ Menu Option Factory Settings

Characteristic

CPI

LPI

Typeface

Proportional Spacing

Bold Print

Italic Print

Slashed Zero

Left Margin

Right Margin

Bottom Margin

Perforation Skip

Form Length

Form Width

Default Setting

10.0

6.0

Data Processing

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

0 columns

0 columns

0 lines

Disable

11.0 inches

279.4 millimeters

66 lines

13.6 inches

345.4 millimeters

136 characters

79

Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes

Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes

The remainder of this chapter describes the P-Series printer control language codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to the printer, in order to invoke and configure numerous P-Series emulation functions.

Format for Control Code Descriptions

The following information is listed for each code function (where applicable):

Name The title or function of the command.

ASCII Code The ASCII mnemonic for the command is shown. Command sequences are in 7-bit (ASCII) form.

Hex Code The code or command sequence in hexadecimal numbers.

Dec Code The code or command sequence in decimal numbers.

Purpose The function(s) of the control code.

Discussion A discussion of the uses of the code or command sequence, including exceptions or limitations to its use.

Example A sample is provided for some control codes when it is possible to illustrate the effect of a control code, or if a specific syntax is required to complete the program statement (i.e. Horizontal Tab set, Vertical Tab set/clear).

Note If you specify any parameters for a control code other than the ones that are defined in the control code description, unpredictable results may occur.

Switching Between the Emulations

The printer supports several different emulations. PCL-II is the default. P-

Series, Proprinter III XL, and Epson FX-1050 are all a part of the LinePrinter

Plus emulation.

The following command switches from PCL-II to P-Series:

ESC%-00000X

To switch from P-Series to PCL-II, send the following command to the printer:

ESC|};KD

80

Special Function Control Code (SFCC) Header

Special Function Control Code (SFCC) Header

A Special Function Control Code (SFCC) is used to extend the control code protocol. The SFCC is the control code introducer (or header); it is the first input in the sequence of parameters. The general control code sequence is:

(SFCC)(parameter 1)(parameter 2)...(parameter n )

P-Series codes can be configured to use any value from 1 through 127 (hex

01 through hex 7F) as control code introducers. For example, bold print could be configured to be enabled in the P-Series protocol using any of the control code introducers listed in Table 15.

Table 15. SFCC Example (Bold Print)

ASCII

SOH G

ETX G

ESC G

^ G

~ G

01 47

03 47

1B 47

5E 47

7E 47

Hex Decimal

01 71

03 71

27 71

94 71

126 71

SFCC Command Line

Print format, print mode, or international language selection can be controlled by a longer sequence known as a command line. Command lines are string type commands placed between complete lines of text and affect the text which follows. The protocol has six command lines: PMODE, OSET, PSET,

LPI, LINES, and INCHES. Each of these command lines is discussed in this chapter under the appropriate Control Code function.

For example, the forms length (in inches) can be set using the following command line: where:

SFCC INCHES; n.f

n is the whole number of inches, and f is the fractional increment in 0.5 inch increments.

When using the SFCC in a command line, the SFCC must be the first nonblank symbol in the line (space, hex 20, is a blank symbol). In addition, characters following spaces (other than a valid line terminator) in a command line are ignored so that user comments can be included on the command line.

The valid line terminators are Form Feed (FF), Line Feed (LF), and Carriage

Return (CR); however, when used in the command line, these line terminators do not cause any paper motion. If a command line contains an error, the command will not be executed.

81

Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes

Attribute Set and Reset Codes

Certain print attributes are set and reset (turned on or off) by using the appropriate SFCC code sequence and the numbers 1 or 0. These may be either the hexadecimal code 01 and 00, or the ASCII code for the printable symbols of decimal 1 and 0 (hexadecimal code 31 and 30, respectively).

Expanded Print, Super/Subscript Print, and Underline are attributes that are set/reset this way.

NUL Code

NUL (hex 00) is ignored by the printer and can be used as a fill character; however, it can not be used to add blank spaces since it is not a space character.

Note Hex 80 in the 0437 PC Character Set and hex 7F in the 0850

PC Character Set are treated as a NUL; however, these two controls can not be used as parameter terminators.

Print Modes Supported for Character Sets

All print modes are supported for all character sets; however, for the character sets listed in Table 16, only the print modes listed are supported.

Table 16. Print Modes Supported

Character Set

Barcode 10 cpi

Multinational DP 10 cpi

Multinational DP 12 cpi

Multinational NLQ 10 cpi

Greek DP 10 cpi

Greek DP 12 cpi

Greek NLQ 10 cpi

Graphic DP 10 cpi

Graphic NLQ 10 cpi

Scientific DP 10 cpi

Scientific DP 12 cpi

Scientific NLQ 10 cpi

OCR-A

OCR-B

Mode Pitch

DP

DP

NLQ

DP

DP

DP

DP

NLQ

NLQ

DP

DP

NLQ

OCR-A 10

OCR-B 10

10

10

12

10

10

12

10

10

10

10

12

10

82

The Control Codes

The Control Codes

This index lists each printer command by function, ASCII mnemonic, and the page where the command is explained in detail. “N/A” means not applicable.

The rest of this chapter defines the control code functions for P-Series

Emulation mode. The commands are listed in alphabetical order.

Note Some control code functions can be accomplished using another control code sequence or via control panel selection.

FUNCTION

Paper Motion

Form Feed

Line Feed

Reverse

Vertical Tab

Page Format

Backspace

Carriage Return

Forms Length Set (Inches)

Forms Length Set (Lines)

Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)

Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)

Line Spacing 8 or 10.3 LPI

(1 line only)

Line Spacing 7/72 Inch

Line Spacing n /72 Inch

Line Spacing n /216 Inch

VFU Commands

ASCII CODE

FF

LF

SFCC } ; n

VT

BS

CR

SFCC INCHES; n.f

SFCC LINES; n

SFCC 2

SFCC LPI

SFCC 0

SFCC LPI

ACK

SFCC f

SFCC 1

SFCC A

SFCC 3

N/A

Print Attributes

Bold Print

Bold Print (1 line only)

Bold Print Reset

Elongated (Double High) Print,

One Line Only

Elongated (Double High) Print,

Set/Reset

Emphasized Print

Emphasized Print Reset

Expanded Print (Double Wide)

One Line Only

SFCC G

SFCC j

SFCC H

SFCC h

SFCC w

SFCC E

SFCC F

SFCC k n

Expanded Print (Double Wide) SFCC W n

Overscoring

Print Mode/Pitch Selection

SFCC _ n

SFCC X m n

SFCC PMODE; n

SFCC [ n q

PAGE

98

100

109

111

85

87

99

99

100

101

101

102

103

104

111

94

94

95

96

96

104

106

86

86

86

93

83

Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes

FUNCTION ASCII CODE

Print Attributes (continued)

Superscript/Subscript Printing SFCC S n

Superscript/Subscript Printing

Reset

Underline

SFCC T

SFCC - n

Graphics

Plot, Even Dot (High Density) EOT

SFCC d

Plot, Odd Dot (Normal Density) ENQ

SFCC e

Other Functions

Bell

Character Set Select

Character Set Select:

ECMA Latin 1 Extended

Character Set Select:

International Languages

BEL

SFCC l xyz

SFCC OSET; n

SFCC R n

SFCC PSET; n

Characters 80-9F

(Control Codes)

Characters 80-9F

(Printable Symbols)

Emulation Reset

Extended Character Set

SFCC 7

SFCC 6

SFCC @

SO

SFCC SO

SFCC n

SFCC 4

Extended Character Set Cancel SI

(Primary Set Select) SFCC SI

SFCC o

SFCC 5

85

88

90

91

92

92

95

97

PAGE

110

110

111

105

105

97

84

Backspace

Backspace

ASCII Code BS

Hex Code 08

Dec Code 08

Purpose Moves the logical print head to the left one character space toward the first character column.

Discussion When configured from the control panel for backspace, BS moves the character position indicator (the logical print head position) one character space to the left at the current character pitch setting. The code is ignored if the logical print head is positioned at the first character column.

Example Print and backspace two character positions.

Bell

ASCII Code BEL

Hex Code 07

Dec Code 07

Purpose Sounds the printer’s buzzer/beeper.

Discussion The BEL function will sound the buzzer/beeper for 0.2 seconds upon receipt of this command.

85

Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes

Bold Print

ASCII Code SFCC G SFCC j

Hex Code SFCC 47 SFCC 6A

Dec Code SFCC 71 SFCC 106

Purpose Selects bold character printing.

Discussion When the bold character printing control code is received, all characters are printed in bold until reset by the bold print reset control code or printer reset. Bold Print is the same as emphasized printing.

When SFCC j is used, bold printing is selected for one line only and reset by the bold print reset control code, emulation reset, or a paper motion command.

Example The following sample illustrates bold character printing.

Bold Print Reset

ASCII Code SFCC H

Hex Code SFCC 48

Dec Code SFCC 72

Purpose Resets bold character printing.

Discussion This control code resets the bold print character attribute. Other print attributes such as double wide printing are not affected.

Example Refer to the Bold Print control code for a sample of bold character print set and reset.

86

Carriage Return

Carriage Return

ASCII Code CR

Hex Code 0D

Dec Code 13

Purpose Returns the logical print head to the first character column

(resets the pointer to the first character position).

Discussion The CR code may or may not cause printing or paper motion, depending on the Define CR Code value defined in the configuration menus. If the Define CR Code submenu displays:

Define CR Code

CR = CR*

The characters following the CR are printed over the previous characters on the line. If identical characters are placed in the same position on the line, those characters will be printed in bold emphasized print when the Overstrike mode is enabled from the control panel.

The CR=CR configuration causes subsequent printable data to overprint previous data at half speed if Overstrike is enabled from the control panel (and prints somewhat faster if Overstrike is disabled), unless an intervening paper motion command is received.

If the Define CR Code submenu displays:

Define CR Code

CR = CR+LF*

Control code CR is converted to perform a carriage return and line feed function.

87

Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes

Character Set Select

ASCII Code SFCC l xyz (lowercase “L”)

Hex Code SFCC 6C xyz

Dec Code SFCC 108 xyz

Purpose Selects the character set, extended character set, and the international language for a specific character set.

where x is the character set (Table 17); y is the international language for the selected character set

(Table 18); z is the extended character set for the selected character set

(Table 19);

Discussion An asterisk (*) (hex 2A) may be submitted for x, y, or z . If the asterisk (*) is the value selected for x , the character set will not change. If * is the value selected for y or z , the previously selected international language and/or extended character set for the selected character set will be used.

The character set, international language and extended character set can also be selected from the printer control panel, via the Character Set and Print Language options; however, the control code setting will override the control panel selection.

Except for the asterisk value discussed above, values other than those shown in the tables will result in the control sequence being terminated.

Table 16 on page 82 provides detailed notes on print mode support for each character set.

Table 17. Character Set Select ( x ) x

0 (hex 30)

1 (hex 31)

2 (hex 32)

3 (hex 33)

Character Set

IBM PC

Multinational

ECMA Latin 1

DEC Multinational

88

Character Set Select

Table 18. International Language Select ( y ) x = 0 (hex 30) y

IBM PC

0 (hex 30)

1 (hex 31)

2 (hex 32)

3 (hex 33)

4 (hex 34)

5 (hex 35)

6 (hex 36)

ASCII (USA)

French

German

English (UK)

Danish

Swedish

Italian

7 (hex 37)

8 (hex 38)

Spanish

Japanese

9 (hex 39) French Canadian

10 (hex 3A) Latin American

11 (hex 3B) Norwegian

12 (hex 3C) Danish-II

13 (hex 3D) Spanish-II

14 (hex 3E) Latin American-II x = 1 (hex 31)

Multinational

ASCII (USA)

EBCDIC x = 2 (hex 32)

ECMA Latin 1

ASCII (USA)

German

Swedish

Danish

Norwegian

Finnish

English (UK)

Dutch

French

Spanish

Italian

Turkish

Japanese x = 3 (hex 33)

DEC Multinational

ASCII (USA)

French

German

English (UK)

Norwegian/Danish

Swedish

Italian

Spanish

Japanese

French Canadian

Dutch

Finnish

Swiss z

0 (hex 30)

1 (hex 31)

2 (hex 32)

3 (hex 33)

4 (hex 34)

5 (hex 35)

6 (hex 36)

7 (hex 37)

8 (hex 38)

9 (hex 39)

10 (hex 3A)

11 (hex 3B)

12 (hex 3C)

Table 19. International Language Select ( z ) x = 0 (hex 30)

IBM PC

IBM PC (0437)

IBM PC (0850) x = 1 (hex 31)

Multinational

Mult. Extended Set x = 2 (hex 32) x = 3 (hex 33)

ECMA Latin 1 DEC Multinational

Barcode 10 cpi

Mult. DP 10 cpi

Mult. DP 12 cpi

Mult. NLQ 10 cpi

Greek DP 10 cpi

Greek DP 12 cpi

Greek NLQ 10 cpi

DEC Mult. Ext. Set

Graphics DP 10 cpi

Graphics NLQ 10 cpi

Scientific DP 10 cpi

Scientific DP 12 cpi

Scientific NLQ 10 cpi

Multinational (at Primary set mode and pitch)

89

Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes

Character Set Select: ECMA Latin 1 Extended

ASCII Code SFCC OSET; n

Purpose Selects the print mode and pitch at which the extended characters will print. Valid only if the ECMA Latin 1 Extended

Character Set is selected; otherwise, this command is ignored.

Discussion n ranges from 0 through 12 (hex 00 through 0B) to select the print mode/pitch combinations available from Table 20. All other values will result in an error message.

OSET is valid only when the ECMA Latin 1 character set has been selected from the control panel. OSET will be ignored if the

IBM PC, Multinational, or DEC Multinational Character Sets are active.

Extended characters will print at the print mode and pitch selected by the OSET command, even if that mode and pitch differs from the currently selected print mode and pitch. If the print mode differs between the extended and primary characters, the first character in the data stream selects the print mode at which that line will print. Different pitches can be printed on the same line.

n

7

8

9

10

11

12

5

6

3

4

0

1

2

Table 20. Print Modes/Pitches Available Using P-Series OSET

(ECMA Latin 1, Extended Character Set Only)

Print Mode/Pitch Select

Barcode DP 10 cpi

Multinational DP 10 cpi

Multinational DP 12 cpi

Multinational NLQ 10 cpi

Greek DP 10 cpi

Greek DP 12 cpi

Greek NLQ 10 cpi

Graphics DP 10 cpi

Graphics NLQ 10 cpi

Scientific DP 10 cpi

Scientific DP 12 cpi

Scientific NLQ 10 cpi

Multinational at Primary Character Set Mode and Pitch

90

Character Set Select: International Languages

Character Set Select: International Languages

n

SFCC R

(hex)

PSET

0 (30)

1 (31)

2 (32)

3 (33)

4 (34)

5 (35)

6 (36)

7 (37)

8 (38)

9 (39)

8

9

0A (3A) 10

0B (3B) 11

0C (3C) 12

0D (3D) 13

0E (3E) 14

0F (3F) 15

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

10 (40)

11 (41)

12 (42)

13 (43)

14 (44)

15 (45)

16

17

18

19

20

21

ASCII Code SFCC PSET; n

Hex Code

Dec Code

Purpose

SFCC R

SFCC 52 n

n

SFCC 82 n

Specifies the international language set identified by n in the basic character set selected from the control panel (ECMA Latin

1, IBM PC, Multinational, and DEC Multinational). where n specifies a language, as shown in Table 21.

ASCII (USA)

German

Swedish

Danish

Norwegian

Finnish

English (UK)

Dutch

French

Spanish

Italian

Turkish

Japanese

Table 21. International Character Sets

ECMA Latin 1

Character Set Selected

IBM PC (0437 or

0850)

ASCII (USA)

French

German

English (UK)

Danish

Swedish

Italian

Spanish

Japanese

French Canadian

Latin American

Danish-II

Spanish-II

Latin American-II

Multinational

ASCII (USA)

EBCDIC

DEC

Multinational

ASCII (USA)

French

German

English (UK)

Norw./Danish

Swedish

Italian

Spanish

Japanese

French Canadian

Dutch

Finnish

Swiss

(currently undefined)

91

Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes

Discussion The international character set can also be selected from the control panel via the Print Language option; however, the control code setting will override the control panel character set selection. Values other than those selectable from Table 21 will be ignored.

Example The following example illustrates international character selection using the IBM PC character set.

Characters 80-9F (Control Codes)

ASCII Code SFCC 7

Hex Code SFCC 37

Dec Code SFCC 55

Purpose Selects hex codes 80 through 9F in the character sets as control codes. Cancels the command SFCC 6.

Discussion This control code overrides the control panel setting.

Characters 80-9F (Printable Symbols)

ASCII Code SFCC 6

Hex Code SFCC 36

Dec Code SFCC 54

Purpose Selects hex codes 80 through 9F in the character sets as printable symbols. Cancels the command SFCC 7.

Discussion This control code overrides the control panel setting.

92

Elongated (Double High) Print, One Line Only

Elongated (Double High) Print, One Line Only

ASCII Code SFCC h

Hex Code SFCC 68

BS

08

Dec Code SFCC 104 08

Purpose Selects elongated (double high) character printing for one line only. Elongated characters are approximately double height but standard width.

Discussion The elongated character control code is a line-by-line print attribute; when the control code is received, one entire line of elongated characters is printed and then automatically reset.

When configured for double high print, the P-Series control code

BS (Hex 08) also selects elongated character printing for a single line.

When using this feature with relative line slewing, the paper will be moved n + 1 lines rather than n lines. Refer to Chapter 7,

“Vertical Page Formatting,” for more information on relative line slewing. When using small line spacing and the lines overlap, an unexpected print format may result.

Example The following sample illustrates elongated character printing.

93

Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes

Elongated (Double High) Print, Set/Reset

ASCII Code SFCC w n

Hex Code SFCC 77 n

Dec Code SFCC 119 n

Purpose Turns double-high character printing on and off. Double-high characters are standard width but twice as high.

where n = 1 or 49 (hex 01 or hex 31) turns double high printing on n = 0 or 48 (hex 00 or hex 30) turns double high printing off

Discussion The OCR A and OCR B fonts cannot be printed in double high.

Note It is recommended to use double Line Feeds and Carriage

Returns when double-high character printing is on (after an

SFCC w control code has been sent), or else the printer will overstrike text that has already printed.

If Superscript/Subscript (SFCC S) is combined with Double High printing, only Double High printing will occur.

Example The following illustrates double-high character printing.

Emphasized Print

ASCII Code SFCC E

Hex Code SFCC 45

Dec Code SFCC 69

Purpose Selects emphasized character print format.

Discussion When the emphasized print control code is received, all characters will be printed in emphasized print until reset by the emphasized print reset control code or printer reset. The emphasized print attribute is implemented by horizontal

“shadow” printing.

Emphasized print is ignored during superscript or subscript printing, and when 15-20 cpi characters have been selected.

Example The following sample illustrates emphasized character printing.

94

Emphasized Print Reset

Emphasized Print Reset

ASCII Code SFCC F

Hex Code SFCC 46

Dec Code SFCC 70

Purpose Resets emphasized character printing.

Discussion The emphasized print reset control code only resets the emphasized print character attribute.

Example See the Emphasized Print control code example for an example of Emphasized Print Reset.

Emulation Reset

ASCII Code SFCC @

Hex Code SFCC 40

Dec Code SFCC 64

Purpose Initializes all print mode related parameters to their factory default or power-up configuration values.

Discussion Print mode, line spacing, international language selection, margins, form length, skip-over perforation, and character pitch are reset to their selected power-up configuration values.

Character-by-character and line-by-line attributes are canceled.

The vertical format unit is cleared. The current line is set to the top-of-form position. Interface parameters and printer protocol selection are not affected.

If the menu option “Reset Cmd CFG Ld” is disabled, the factory default configuration is loaded. If it is enabled, the power-up configuration is used. The default is the factory default.

95

Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes

Expanded Print (Double Wide), One Line Only

ASCII Code SFCC k

Hex Code SFCC 6B

Dec Code SFCC 107

Purpose Selects expanded (double wide) print for one line only.

Discussion This expanded print control code is a line-by-line print attribute; when the SFCC k control code is received, the current line is printed double wide and then automatically reset.

This control code can be reset by a paper motion control code

(LF, VT, CR, etc.), SFCC @ (printer reset), CAN or SFCC W

(double wide print).

Example The following sample illustrates Expanded Print for one line only.

Another example of expanded printing is shown for Expanded

(Double Wide) Print, SFCC W on page 96.

Expanded Print (Double Wide), Set/Reset

ASCII Code SFCC W n

Hex Code SFCC 57 n

Dec Code SFCC 87 n

Purpose where

Selects or resets expanded (double wide) print.

n = SOH (hex 01) or 1 (hex 31) selects expanded print.

n = NUL (hex 00) or 0 (hex 30) resets expanded print.

Discussion When expanded print using SFCC W is received, all characters will be printed double wide until reset by the expanded print reset control code or a printer reset.

Example The following sample illustrates expanded character printing and expanded character printing reset.

96

Extended Character Set

Extended Character Set

ASCII Code SO

Hex Code 0E

SFCC SO

SFCC 0E

SFCC n

SFCC 6E

SFCC 4

SFCC 34

Dec Code 14

Purpose

SFCC 14 SFCC 110 SFCC 52

Accesses the extended character set in the range hex A0 through FF using codes 32 through 127 (hex 20 through 7F).

Discussion Used in 7-bit systems as if data bit 8 was set to 1. For example, sending code hex 20 accesses the symbol at code point hex A0.

If a printable symbol is not available at the code point, a space is printed.

SFCC 4 is not cancelled by the next paper motion command;

SO, SFCC SO, and SFCC n are cancelled by paper motion.

Example The following sample illustrates the Extended Character Set and

Extended Character Set Cancel (see page 97) control codes.

Extended Character Set Cancel (Primary Set Select)

ASCII Code SI

Hex Code 0F

Dec Code 15

SFCC SI

SFCC 0F

SFCC 15

SFCC o SFCC 5

SFCC 6F SFCC 35

SFCC 111 SFCC 53

Purpose Cancels Extended Character Set as selected by SO, SFCC SO,

SFCC n, and SFCC 4, and selects the Primary Character Set.

Discussion Used in 7-bit systems. If data bit 8 is disabled, this control code selects the range as if data bit 8 is set to 0, and data is printed as characters from 32 through 127 (hex 20 through 7F).

Example Refer to the Extended Character Set example on page 97.

97

Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes

Form Feed

ASCII Code FF

Hex Code 0C

Dec Code 12

Purpose Prints the data in the buffer, advances the paper position to the next top-of-form and moves the character position to the first character column.

Discussion The default forms length is determined by the printer configuration. Forms length is set by using the control panel or forms length control codes. Code FF cancels all single-line only print attributes.

The default form length is 11 inches. The Form Feed command will react differently when the VFU is active. Refer to Chapter 7.

98

Forms Length Set (Inches)

Forms Length Set (Inches)

ASCII Code SFCC INCHES; n.f

Purpose Sets the length of forms (paper) in inches.

where n = 1 through 24 (hex 01 through 18) specify the number of inches on a page.

f = fractional number in .5-inch increments (minimum forms length is .5 inches).

Discussion Upon receipt of this code, the current line becomes the first line of the form, and the form length set becomes the current forms length. Vertical tab positions set below the bottom of the form are cleared.

Forms length is defined in inches; therefore, subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the result of this command.

Increments of .5-inch can be specified; for example, sending the following command will result in a form length setting of 7 ½ inches: SFCC INCHES; 7.5

The maximum forms length is 24 inches. All other values are ignored. In INCHES mode, incorrect values will produce an error message.

Forms length can be set by the control panel. The control code forms length setting from the host computer will override the control panel setting. If the VFU is enabled and loaded, this command is ignored.

Forms Length Set (Lines)

ASCII Code SFCC LINES; n

Purpose where

Sets the length of a form (paper) in lines.

n = 1 through 192 (hex 01 through C0) specify the number of lines per page at the current line spacing.

Discussion The forms length is set to the number of lines defined by the quotient of n and the current line spacing so that the units are in inches. In LINES mode, the maximum form length is 24 inches, and n values in excess of 24 inches will cause an error message.

If the calculated forms length in lines is not an exact multiple of the target machine dot size, the forms length value will be adjusted down to the next possible multiple.

If the VFU is enabled and loaded, this command is ignored.

99

Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes

Line Feed

ASCII Code LF

Hex Code 0A

Dec Code 10

Purpose Prints the data in the buffer (if any) and advances the vertical character position one line at the current line space setting.

Discussion If configured for LF equals new line (LF=CR+LF), the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 of the new line.

Otherwise, the logical print head does not move when configured for LF function only (LF=LF ONLY). The LF function cancels all single line print attributes such as double high

(elongated) and double wide (expanded) characters.

This code is always configured for LF=CR+LF in the P-Series protocol.

In the P-Series Even Dot Plot mode (high density graphics), the

LF code does not cause paper position motion; the data in the buffer is plotted and the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 in anticipation of the Odd Dot Plot control code to complete high density graphic plotting.

In the P-Series Odd Dot Plot mode (normal density graphics), the LF code plots the data in the buffer, advances the paper position a single dot row at the current vertical dot density, and positions the logical print head at character column 1.

Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)

ASCII Code SFCC 2

Hex Code SFCC 32

Dec Code SFCC 50

SFCC LPI; n

Purpose Sets line spacing to 6 lpi or as set by SFCC A (page 103).

Discussion For SFCC LPI; n , the value of n can be 6 or 8 only. If n = 6, this command sets line spacing to 1/6 inch. Values of n other than 6 or 8 will cause an error message.

SFCC 2 asserts n /72-inch line spacing as set by SFCC A (page

103). If no distance has been set by SFCC A, the distance is 1/6”

The control code line spacing selection will override the control panel line spacing setting.

Example The following example illustrates 1/6-inch line spacing and assumes that a distance has not been set by ESC A.

100

Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)

Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)

ASCII Code SFCC 0

Hex Code SFCC 30

SFCC LPI; n

Dec Code SFCC 48

Purpose Specifies continuous line spacing at 1/8-inch increments (8 lpi).

Discussion When the 1/8-inch line spacing control code is received, all lines will be printed at 8 lpi until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. The control code line spacing selection will override the control panel line spacing setting.

For SFCC LPI; n , the value of n can be 6 or 8 only. If n = 8, this command sets line spacing to 1/8 inch. Values of n other than 6 or 8 will cause an error message.

Example The following example illustrates 1/8-inch line spacing.

Line Spacing 8 or 10.3 lpi (1 Line Only)

ASCII Code ACK

Hex Code 06

Dec Code 06

SFCC f

SFCC 66

SFCC 102

Purpose Selects line spacing of 8 or 10.3 lpi for the current line only.

Discussion The default line spacing is reselected automatically after one line. Line spacing may be selected either through the control panel or by line spacing control codes. The control code setting will override the control panel line spacing setting.

If the alternate line spacing selected from the control panel is 8 lpi, the ACK control code will set the line spacing to 8 lpi. If 10.3 lpi was selected from the control panel, the ACK control code will set the line spacing to 10.3 lpi (7/72”).

Example The following example illustrates printing a single line of text at 8 lpi.

101

Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes

Line Spacing 7/72 Inch

ASCII Code SFCC 1

Hex Code SFCC 31

Dec Code SFCC 49

Purpose Specifies the line spacing at 7/72-inch (10.3 lpi) increments.

Discussion When the 7/72-inch line spacing control code is received, all lines will be printed at the 7/72-inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. The control code line spacing selection will override the control panel line spacing setting, and the message display will reflect the line spacing as

10.3 lines per inch.

Caution should be used when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated (Double High),

Superscript, or Subscript; overlapping lines may occur. Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities will not overlap.

Example The following example illustrates 7/72-inch line spacing.

102

Line Spacing n/72 Inch

Line Spacing n/72 Inch

ASCII Code SFCC A n

Hex Code SFCC 41 n

Dec Code SFCC 65 n

Purpose Stores a line spacing of n /72-inch increments.

where n = 1 through 85 (hex 01 through 55). All others are ignored.

Discussion When the SFCC A control sequence is received, all line feed commands following an SFCC 2 sequence* will be at n /72-inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. The control code line spacing selection will override the control panel line spacing setting.

*The SFCC 2 sequence (page 100) asserts the line spacing which was stored by the preceding SFCC A sequence.

Small values of n may result in overlapping lines. Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated

(Double High), Superscript, or Subscript characters are used on the same line. Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities will not overlap.

Example The following example illustrates 20/72-inch line spacing.

103

Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes

Line Spacing n/216 Inch

ASCII Code SFCC 3 n

Hex Code SFCC 33 n

Dec Code SFCC 51 n

Purpose Specifies the line spacing at n /216-inch increments.

where n = 1 through 255 (hex 01 through FF).

Discussion When the n /216-inch line spacing control code is received, all line feeds following will be at n /216-inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. The control code line spacing selection will override the control panel line spacing setting.

The vertical character position moves only in multiples of the current dot row spacing. If the distance to move is other than a multiple of the current dot row spacing, the remainder is added to the next paper motion command.

Caution should be used when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated (Double High),

Superscript, or Subscript; overlapping lines may occur. Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities will not overlap.

Example The following example illustrates n /216-inch line spacing.

Overscoring

ASCII Code SFCC _ n

Hex Code SFCC 5F n

Dec Code SFCC 95 n

Purpose where

Enables or disables automatic overscoring of all characters.

n = SOH (hex 01) or 1 (hex 31) selects overscore print.

n = NUL (hex 00) or 0 (hex 30) resets overscore print.

Discussion When automatic overscore is enabled, all characters, including spaces, will be overscored until disabled.

Example The following sample illustrates automatic overscoring and overscoring reset.

104

Plot, Even Dot (P-Series High Density Graphics)

Plot, Even Dot (P-Series High Density Graphics)

ASCII Code EOT

Hex Code 04

SFCC d

SFCC 64

Dec Code 04

Purpose

SFCC 100

Prints dots at the even numbered dot columns.

Discussion The even dot plot code is used for programming high density graphics and must be used in conjunction with the Odd Dot Plot code (hex 05). Refer to the Plot Mode section in Chapter 6 for detailed plot mode information.

Example Print two high density plot boxes using odd and even dot plot for high density graphics. Compare the example below to the normal density odd dot plot example.

Plot, Odd Dot (P-Series Normal Density Graphics)

ASCII Code ENQ

Hex Code 05

Dec Code 05

SFCC e

SFCC 65

SFCC 101

Purpose Prints dots at the odd numbered dot columns.

Discussion This is the P-Series programming normal density graphics control code. The ENQ code should occur before any printable data in the data stream. For high density graphics, the Even Dot

Plot code (04 hex) must be used in conjunction with (and precede) the Odd Dot Plot code. Refer to the P-Series

Compatible Plot mode section in Chapter 6 for detailed plot mode information.

Example Print two normal density plot boxes using odd dot plot. Compare the odd dot plot example below to the high density Even Dot Plot example.

105

Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes

Print Mode/Pitch Selection

ASCII Code SFCC PMODE; n

Hex Code

Dec Code

Purpose

SFCC X mn

SFCC 58 n mn SFCC 5B n 71

SFCC 88 mn SFCC 91 n 113

Selects the print mode and character pitch in characters per inch

(cpi).

where where where

In SFCC PMODE; n n = 0 through 11 to select the print mode/pitch combinations available from Table 22. All other values will result in an error message.

In SFCC [ n q n = Print Mode/Pitch code (values other than those shown in

Table 23 are ignored.) q = Command sequence terminator

In SFCC X mn m = Print Mode code n = Pitch (cpi)

An asterisk (*) (hex 2A) may be substituted for m or n.

Whenever the asterisk replaces m or n , its current value will not change.

Values other than those shown in Table 24 and Table 25 are ignored.

Note The print mode must be changed before the first printable symbol or space of a print line or the command sequence is deferred until the next line.

Discussion P-Series PMODE switches to the Primary Character Set and selects print mode and pitch.

Print mode and pitch can also be selected from the control panel. The print mode/pitch select control code from the host computer will override the control panel print mode setting and the print mode and pitch selection will be reflected on the message display.

If PMODE 7 through 11 are selected to enable upside down characters, the printing is still left to right. Even though characters are upside down, you must reverse the order to read left to right.

A complete set of tables identifying print mode, pitch, and dot densities for all print modes follows.

106

Print Mode/Pitch Selection

Table 22. Print Mode and Pitch (SFCC PMODE; n ) n

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

10

11

8

9

Print Mode and Pitch

DP 10 cpi

DP 12 cpi

DP 15 cpi

NLQ 10 cpi

HS 10 cpi

OCR-A 10 cpi

OCR-B 10 cpi

DP 10 cpi upside down

DP 12 cpi upside down

DP 13 cpi upside down

DP 15 cpi upside down

DP 17 cpi upside down

Table 23. Print Mode and Pitch (SFCC [ n q)

Print Mode and Pitch n

1 (hex 31)

2 (hex 32)

3 (hex 33)

4 (hex 34)

5 (hex 35)

NLQ 10 cpi

DP 10 cpi

HS 12 cpi

DP 12 cpi

DP 13 cpi

107

Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes

Table 24. Horizontal and Vertical Dot Density (SFCC X) m (Hex*)

Horiz. Density

Resolution

Vertical Density Print Mode

0 (30)

1 (31)

2 (32)

3 (33)

4 (34)

5 (35)

6 (36)

7 (37)

120 dpi

180 dpi

120 dpi

120 dpi

120 dpi

120 dpi

120 dpi

120 dpi

72 dpi

96 dpi

48 dpi

48 dpi

48 dpi

144 dpi

144 dpi

72 dpi

DP

NLQ

HS

HS

HS

OCR-A

OCR-B

DP

8 (38) 120 dpi 72 dpi DP

*The hex values shown (i.e., 0 and 30) are equal. Either value can be used in your program expression.

Table 25. Print Mode and Character Pitches (SFCC X)

Characters Per Inch value of n : value of m :

Print Mode*

DP

0 (30)

NLQ

1 (31)

HS

2 (32)

HS

3 (33)

HS

4 (34)

OCR-A

5 (35)

OCR-B

6 (36)

DP

7 (37)

DP

8 (38)

0 (30)

1 (31)

2 (32)

3 (33)

4 (34)

5 (35)

10

12

13

15

17

20

10

12

13

15

17

20

10

12

13

15

17

20

10

12

13

15

17

20

10

12

13

15

17

20

10

10

10

*The hex values shown (i.e., 0 and 30) are equal. Either value can be used in your program expression.

The value of m is represented by the font choice line.

10

108

Reverse

Note The character set used when OCR-A or OCR-B are selected depends on the Standard character set currently selected.

The character set can be changed by using SFCC l or by using the front panel.

Example Any of the BASIC expressions listed below will select the DP print mode at 17 cpi.

where m (print mode) = SOH (hex 00) or 0 (hex 30) n (pitch) = EOT (hex 04) or 4 (hex 34)

CHR$(1);“X”;CHR$(0);CHR$(4);

CHR$(1);“X”;CHR$(30);CHR$(34);

CHR$(1);“X04”;

Reverse

ASCII Code SFCC } ; n

Hex Code SFCC 7D 3B n

Dec Code SFCC 125 59 n

Purpose Moves the logical print head up.

Discussion If n is “L,” the print head moves up one line. (Reverse line feed.)

If n is “P,” the print head moves up to the previous top of form.

(Reverse form feed.)

109

Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes

Superscript/Subscript Printing

ASCII Code SFCC S n

Hex Code SFCC 53 n

Dec Code SFCC 83 n

Purpose Selects superscript or subscript printing.

Discussion An SFCC S code can be set for superscript or subscript printing, as follows: where n = SOH (hex 01) or 1 (hex 31) enables subscript printing.

n = NUL (hex 00) or 0 (hex 30) enables superscript printing.

When this control code is received, all characters will be superscript or subscript until reset by the super/subscript printing reset control code (SFCC T) or printer reset. Use caution when combining this command with other print attributes; arbitrary combinations might yield unexpected results.

Note Superscript and subscript characters print at the same size as the current font. They are shifted up or down one half of a line.

Example The following sample illustrates superscript/subscript printing.

Superscript/Subscript Printing Reset

ASCII Code SFCC T

Hex Code SFCC 54

Dec Code SFCC 84

Purpose Resets superscript and subscript printing.

Example See the Superscript/Subscript Printing command example.

110

Underline

Underline

ASCII Code SFCC - n

Hex Code SFCC 2D n

Dec Code SFCC 45 n

Purpose Enables or disables automatic underlining of all characters.

where n = SOH (hex 01) or 1 (hex 31) enables automatic underlining.

n = NUL (hex 00) or 0 (hex 30) disables automatic underlining.

Discussion When automatic underline is enabled, all characters, including spaces, will be underlined until disabled.

Example The following sample illustrates automatic underlining.

VFU Commands

ASCII Code Refer to the P-Series VFU section in Chapter 7.

Purpose Load and execute the VFU.

Discussion Refer to Chapter 7 for detailed information.

Vertical Tab

ASCII Code VT

Hex Code 0B

Dec Code 11

Purpose Prints the data in the buffer and advances the paper to the next vertical tab position.

Discussion If a vertical tab format is defined in the EVFU (channel 12) and the VFU is enabled, the paper is moved to the next vertical tab position.

If a vertical tab format is not defined, the paper is advanced to the next line at the current line spacing. More information on

Vertical Tabs is provided in the EVFU section of Chapter 7.

111

Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes

112

4

IBM Proprinter III XL

Emulation

Overview

This chapter describes the Proprinter III XL emulation host control codes.

“Emulation” refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language. A printer control language is the coding system used to convey, manipulate, and print data. It contains character codes and command sequences that configure the emulation. In this manual, the terms “emulation”, “printer protocol”, and “printer control language” are synonymous.

In the Proprinter III XL emulation mode, your printer can print files coded for the Proprinter III XL printer control language. To select the Proprinter emulation as the active printer emulation, select LinePrinter+ from the

EMULATION menu and Proprinter III XL from the Printer Protocol menu, as described in the User’s Guide.

The Proprinter III XL emulation provides many configurable parameters. The default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 26. You can modify these parameter values in two ways:

The Proprinter III XL host control codes. An extensive set of Proprinter

III XL control code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host computer via the host data stream. Most of this chapter is devoted to describing the Proprinter III XL control code commands.

The printer configuration menus. You can modify a subset of the

Proprinter III XL emulation parameters using the printer configuration menus, control panel keys, and LCD, as described in the User’s Guide.

Control codes sent from a host system generally override previous settings that result from the configuration menus.

Note Configuration values selected from the menus or via host control codes can be saved to the printer’s NVRAM memory so that they will not be lost when you power off the printer or reset it to the factory default configuration. The menu selection for saving a configuration to memory is described in the User’s Guide.

113

Chapter 4 Overview

Proprinter III XL Emulation Default Settings

The factory settings for the Proprinter III XL emulation menu options are shown in Table 26. Table 27 lists additional factory settings for parameters provided by the LinePrinter+ formatting menus. (The EMULATION menu options are described in the User’s Guide ). Host control codes can override many of the settings for these menu options.

Table 26. Proprinter III XL Menu Option Factory Settings

Characteristic

Define CR Code

Auto LF

Define LF Code

FF Valid at TOF

Character Set

Alt. Char Set

20 CPI Condensed

Default Setting

CR = CR

Enable

LF = LF

Enable

Code Page 437

Set 1

Enable

114

Proprinter III XL Emulation Default Settings

Table 27. LinePrinter+ Menu Option Factory Settings

Characteristic

CPI

LPI

Typeface

Proportional Spacing

Bold Print

Italic Print

Slashed Zero

Left Margin

Right Margin

Bottom Margin

Perforation Skip

Form Length

Form Width

Default Setting

10.0

6.0

Data Processing

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

0 columns

0 columns

0 lines

Disable

11.0 inches

279.4 millimeters

66 lines

13.6 inches

345.4 millimeters

136 characters

115

Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes

Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control

Codes

The remainder of this chapter describes the Proprinter printer control language codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to the printer, in order to configure numerous Proprinter emulation parameters.

Format for Control Code Descriptions

In this chapter, the following information is listed for each control code (where applicable):

Name The title or function of the command.

ASCII Code The ASCII mnemonic for the command is shown. Command sequences are in 7-bit (ASCII) form.

Hex Code The code or command sequence in hexadecimal numbers.

Dec Code The code or command sequence in decimal numbers.

Purpose The function(s) of the control code.

Discussion A discussion of the uses of the code or command sequence, including exceptions or limitations to its use.

Example A sample is provided when it is possible to illustrate the effect of a control code or if a specific syntax is required.

Note If you specify any parameters for a control code other than the ones that are defined in the control code description, unpredictable results may occur. The PI line is never recognized in Proprinter III XL Emulation mode.

Escape Control Codes Overview

Printer capability is greatly increased by the use of escape control code sequences. Escape sequences always begin with the ASCII escape sequence introducer, ESC (hex 1B). Many of the ASCII control codes described in this chapter are escape sequences.

IMPORTANT An Escape code can occur anywhere in the datastream and is acted upon immediately if it precedes a valid command.

An ESC sequence introducer in the data stream signals the printer to wait for special instructions, even if it is ready and printing. The character codes following the ESC character tell the printer what to do.

Note For readability, code sequences appear in this manual with spaces inserted between command elements. Do not insert spaces between code characters when you are programming unless the ASCII space character (SP) is part of a code sequence. For example, a code sequence printed in this manual as ESC [ 1 is programmed as ESC[1.

116

Graphics Control Codes Overview

An escape sequence uses two or more bytes to define a specific printer control function. The format for an escape sequence is:

ASCII

Hex

ESC

1B

Escape Sequence

Introducer

X

00-7F

Character(s) n

0-FF

Numerical parameter(s)

After the ESC character are one or more characters which indicate the action of the control code. One or more numerical parameters may in turn follow these characters. For example, the sequence ESC S n tells the printer to begin the superscript print attribute if n is an even number, or to begin the subscript attribute if n is an odd number.

If the characters following the ESC code are not within the defined ranges, or if they are within the defined ranges but not recognized as a function of this printer, the entire sequence is ignored.

Graphics Control Codes Overview

The individual control codes that set graphics print quality are described starting on page 123. Some additional background information about graphics printing for the Proprinter III XL emulation is provided here.

The Proprinter III XL emulation provides one data protocol for printing graphics information; the Bit Image graphics protocol allows an image block to be printed. When using the Bit Image protocol, you can mix text and graphics on the same line.

Setting Bit Image Modes via Control Codes

Control codes select bit image modes. The following bit image modes can be mixed on the same line as text characters:

Table 28. Bit Image Modes

Control Code

ESC K n1 n2 data

ESC L n1 n2 data

ESC Y n1 n2 data

ESC Z n1 n2 data

Bit Image Mode

Normal Density

Double Density

Double Density, Double Speed

Quadruple Density

Parameters n1 and n2 together represent a 16-bit (hexadecimal) unsigned number of the quantity ( n1 + 256 n2 ), which equals the number of bit image characters (i.e. data bytes) to follow. If n1 and n2 are programmed so that data extends past the last character position, the data is truncated at the last character position. If n1 and n2 are both zero, the ESC sequence is ignored.

See Chapter 6 for details on bit image graphics.

117

Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes

Dot Density Versus Printing Speed

When you select ESC K (normal density), the dot columns are printed at 60 dots per inch (dpi) horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. This does not decrease printing speed.

If ESC L (double density) is selected, the dot columns are printed at 120 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. Double density reduces printing speed by one half.

With ESC Y (double density, double speed), dot columns are printed at 120 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically, but adjacent dots are not printed. Double density, double speed does not decrease printing speed.

When ESC Z (quadruple density) is selected, the dot columns are printed at

240 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. Quadruple density reduces printing speed by one half.

All line-by-line character print attributes are ignored in Bit Image graphics. The most significant bit for each data character is the uppermost dot position in the vertical dot image pattern. A bit value of 1 indicates a dot; a value of 0 indicates a blank. In 7-bit RS-232E serial interface protocol, the most significant bit (bit 8) is cleared to 0.

Code Page and Character Set Control Codes

A code page is a set of symbols consisting of letters, numbers, and graphic elements. For the Proprinter III XL emulation, your printer supports characters from IBM’s Code Page 0437 and Code Page 0850, among an extensive array of different print quality and print language sets. The print language sets are selected using the Print Language configuration menu option, which is described in detail in your User’s Guide.

Two columns of characters, hex 80 through 9F, may be configured as either control codes or printable symbols. Control code ESC 7 selects Character Set

1 (hex 80-9F configured as control codes). Control code ESC 6 selects

Character Set 2 (hex 80-9F configured as printable symbols).

Ignored Codes

The control codes recognized by the Proprinter III XL emulation software are described in this chapter. Control codes not described in this chapter are undefined and ignored. In addition, codes that represent printable characters

(hex 10, 11, 15, 21-7E, and 80-FF) are not available as Proprinter III XL control codes.

Note Entering control codes that are not defined in this chapter may produce unpredictable results.

The ASCII control code ETX (hex code 03 or 1B 03) is ignored as a Proprinter

III XL control code, but is valid for the Serial Interface Protocol.

118

Switching Between the Emulations

Reserved Codes

The Download Characters control code (ASCII code ESC =, hex code 1B 3D) is a reserved code. It is not implemented at this time. When implemented, this code is usually followed by large blocks of data. The Proprinter III XL emulation will currently ignore this control code and any data applicable to it.

Switching Between the Emulations

The printer supports several different emulations. PCL-II is the default. P-

Series, Proprinter III XL, and Epson FX-1050 are all a part of the LinePrinter

Plus emulation.

The following command switches from PCL-II to Proprinter:

ESC%-00001X

To switch from Proprinter to PCL-II, send the following command to the printer:

ESC|};KD

119

Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes

The Control Codes

This index lists each printer command by function, ASCII mnemonic, and the page where the command is explained in detail. The rest of this chapter defines the control code functions for Proprinter III XL emulation mode. The commands are listed in alphabetical order.

FUNCTION ASCII CODE PAGE

Paper Motion

Form Feed

Line Feed

Line Feed n /216 Inch

(One Line Only)

Tab, Vertical

Tab Set/Clear, Vertical

Tabs, Clear All

Format

Backspace

Cancel

Carriage Return

Carriage Return Set

Forms Length Set in Inches

Forms Length Set in Lines

Margin, Bottom

Margin Cancel, Bottom

Margins, Horizontal

Set Top-of-Form

Tab, Horizontal

Tab Set/Clear, Horizontal

Tabs, Clear All

FF

LF

ESC J

VT

BS

CAN

CR

ESC 5 n

ESC C NUL n

ESC C n

ESC N n

ESC O

ESC X n m

ESC 4

HT

ESC D n1 n2...nk NUL

ESC R n

ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL

ESC R

134

138

139

152

153

153

122

128

128

129

134

135

144

144

144

149

151

151

153

Line Spacing

Line Spacing 1/8” (8 lpi)

Line Spacing 7/72” (10.3 lpi)

Line Spacing n /72 Inch

(Executes)

Line Spacing n /72 Inch

(Storage)

Line Spacing n /216 Inch

ESC 0

ESC 1

ESC 2

ESC A n

ESC 3 n

Selection of Alternate Character Set 80-9F

Character Set Select: Set 1 (A) ESC 7

Character Set Select: Set 2 (B) ESC 6

140

140

141

142

143

129

129

120

The Control Codes

FUNCTION ASCII CODE PAGE

Print Quality

Bold Printing

Bold Printing, Cancel

Character Pitch 12 cpi

Condensed Print

Condensed Print, Cancel

Double Wide Print

ESC G

ESC H

ESC :

SI

DC2

ESC W

Double Wide Print (1 Line Only) SO

Double Wide Print (1 Line Only), n

Cancel

Emphasized Print

Emphasized Print, Cancel

DC4

ESC E

ESC F n

Print Mode

Print Quality

Proportional Spacing

Select Attributes

ESC I

ESC x n

n

ESC P n

ESC [ @ n1 NUL NUL NUL n2 n3 148

Superscript/Subscript Printing ESC S n 150

132

133

133

145

146

147

147

Superscript/Subscript Printing,

Cancel

Underline

ESC T

ESC - n

127

127

129

130

130

131

132

150

154

Bit Image

Bit Image Mode, Single Density

(Normal Speed)

Bit Image Mode, Double Density

(Half Speed)

Bit Image Mode, Double Density

(Normal Speed)

ESC K

ESC L

n1 n2

n1 n2

ESC Y n1 n2

Bit Image Mode, Quadruple Density

(Half Speed) ESC Z n1 n2

Other Functions

Bell

Deselect Printer

Escape Sequence

Initialize Parameters

Print All Characters

Print Next Character

Unidirectional Printing

BEL

ESC Q 22

ESC

ESC [ K n1 NUL n2 n3 n4 n5

ESC \ n1 n2

ESC ^ n

ESC U n

123

124

125

126

122

131

116

136

145

146

154

121

Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes

Backspace

ASCII Code BS

Hex Code 08

Dec Code 08

Purpose Moves the logical print head left one character space toward the first character column.

Discussion BS moves the character position indicator one character space to the left at the current character pitch setting. This code is ignored if the logical print head is positioned at the first character column.

When the backspace code is received, printing speed will be reduced. If the printer is in double width mode, the backspace code moves the print head left two normal character spaces.

Example Print and backspace two character positions.

Bell

ASCII Code BEL

Hex Code 07

Dec Code 07

Purpose Sounds a buzzer/beeper.

Discussion The BEL function will sound one beep upon receipt of this command.

122

Bit Image Mode, Single Density (Normal Speed)

Bit Image Mode, Single Density (Normal Speed)

ASCII Code ESC K n1 n2

Hex Code 1B 4B n1 n2

Dec Code 27 75 n1 n2

Purpose Selects single (normal) density bit image graphics.

where n1 + 256 n2 defines the number of data bytes to follow.

DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.

n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )

(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256

(quotient of division)

Discussion This code prints specified data as bit image graphics at normal density, 60 dots per inch horizontally and 72 dots per inch vertically. For more information, see “Bit Image Graphics” on page 201.

Example The following example produces a pattern of Single Density Bit

Image graphics. The 9-byte bit pattern is repeated 27 times.

Compare this example to the double density and quadruple density examples.

123

Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes

Bit Image Mode, Double Density (Half Speed)

ASCII Code ESC L n1 n2

Hex Code 1B 4C n1 n2

Dec Code 27 76 n1 n2

Purpose Selects double density bit image graphics.

where n1 + 256 n2 defines the number of data bytes to follow.

DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.

n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )

(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256

(quotient of division)

Discussion This code prints specified data as bit image graphics at double horizontal density, 120 dots per inch horizontally and 72 dots per inch vertically. This code causes print speed to be reduced by half from normal density speed. For more information, see “Bit

Image Graphics” on page 201.

Example The following example produces Double Density Bit Image graphics of the pattern used in the Single Density Bit Image

Mode example. Note that the amount of data must be doubled in order to produce this pattern for double density (the data is used

54 times rather than 27).

124

Bit Image Mode, Double Density (Normal Speed)

Bit Image Mode, Double Density (Normal Speed)

ASCII Code ESC Y n1 n2

Hex Code 1B 59 n1 n2

Dec Code 27 89 n1 n2

Purpose Selects double density bit image graphics at single density speed.

where n1 + 256 n2 defines the number of data bytes to follow.

DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.

n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )

(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256

(quotient of division)

Discussion This code prints specified data as bit image graphics at double horizontal density, 120 dots per inch horizontally and 72 dots per inch vertically. By ignoring adjacent dots, the print speed is not reduced from the normal density speed. For more information, see “Bit Image Graphics” on page 201.

Example The following example produces a Double Density Normal

Speed Bit Image graphics for the same pattern as in the Normal

(Single) Density example. Note that the amount of data must be doubled for double density (the data is used 54 times rather than

27).

125

Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes

Bit Image Mode, Quadruple Density (Half Speed)

ASCII Code ESC Z n1 n2

Hex Code 1B 5A n1 n2

Dec Code 27 90 n1 n2

Purpose Selects quadruple density bit image graphics.

where n1 + 256 n2 defines the number of data bytes to follow.

DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.

n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )

(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256

(quotient of division)

Discussion This code prints specified data as bit image graphics at quadruple density, 240 dots per inch horizontally and 72 dots per inch vertically. This code causes print speed to be reduced by half. For more information, see “Bit Image Graphics” on page

201.

Example The following example produces quadruple density graphics of the pattern used in the Single Density Bit Image Mode example.

Note that the amount of data must be quadrupled for quadruple density (the data is used 108 times rather than 27).

126

Bold Printing

Bold Printing

ASCII Code ESC G

Hex Code 1B 47

Dec Code 27 71

Purpose Selects bold character printing.

Discussion When this command is received, all characters are printed in bold until reset by the Bold Print Reset control code or printer reset. The bold print attribute is implemented by increasing the dot density for the bold text (with a result similar to emphasized printing). Bold printing reduces the current print speed by one half.

Note The ESC E (page 133) and ESC G commands are equivalent; they produce the same print effect.

Example The following sample illustrates bold character printing.

Bold Printing, Cancel

ASCII Code ESC H

Hex Code 1B 48

Dec Code 27 72

Purpose Cancels bold printing.

Discussion No other print attributes are changed.

127

Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes

Cancel

ASCII Code CAN

Hex Code 18

Dec Code 24

Purpose Clears the print buffer of all symbols since the last paper motion command was received.

Discussion The CAN command cancels all characters sent to the printer after the last paper motion command.

This command will cancel the double wide attribute if set by SO.

No other print attributes are affected.

Carriage Return

ASCII Code CR

Hex Code 0D

Dec Code 13

Purpose Returns the logical print head to the first character column

(resets the pointer to the first character position). May be configured to include a line feed.

Discussion The CR code is configured via the ESC 5 code or via the control panel menus (described in the User’s Guide ). The CR = CR configuration causes the character position indicator to be positioned at character column one; subsequent printable data preceding a paper motion command overstrikes previously printed data. The CR = CR + LF configuration causes the CR code to perform a carriage return plus a line feed.

The CR code also cancels expanded (double wide) print when set by code SO (single line printing attribute).

128

Carriage Return Set

Carriage Return Set

ASCII Code ESC 5 n

Hex Code 1B 35 n

Dec Code 27 53 n

Purpose Defines the result from the Carriage Return (CR) code.

where n may range from 0 through 255 (hex 00 through hex FF).

If n = 0, 2, 4 ... (any even value), then CR = CR (the default).

If n = 1, 3, 5 ... (any odd value), then CR = CR + LF.

Discussion This command overrides the configuration menu setting.

• CR = CR (default) configuration causes the character position indicator to be positioned at character column one. Subsequent printable data preceding a paper motion command overstrikes previous printable data.

• CR = CR + LF configuration causes the CR code to perform a carriage return plus a line feed.

Character Pitch 12 cpi

ASCII Code ESC :

Hex Code 1B 3A

Dec Code 27 58

Purpose Sets character pitch to 12 cpi.

Discussion An ESC : code overrides any control panel setting.

Character Set Select: Set 1 (A)

ASCII Code ESC 7

Hex Code 1B 37

Dec Code 27 55

Purpose Selects hex codes 80 through 9F in the character sets as control codes. Cancels the command ESC 6.

Discussion This code overrides the control panel setting Alt. Char Set.

Character Set Select: Set 2 (B)

ASCII Code ESC 6

Hex Code 1B 36

Dec Code 27 54

Purpose Selects hex codes 80 through 9F in the character sets as printable symbols. Cancels the command ESC 7.

Discussion This control code overrides the control panel setting Alt. Char

Set. Appendix C shows the printable symbols for hex codes 80 through 9F.

129

Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes

Condensed Print

ASCII Code SI

Hex Code 0F

ESC SI

1B 0F

Dec Code 15

Purpose

27 15

Sets condensed print.

Discussion If the emulation is set at 5 cpi, it is changed to 8.55 cpi.

If the emulation is set at 10 cpi, it is changed to 17.1 cpi.

If the emulation is set at 12 cpi, it is changed to 20 cpi.

If the emulation is set at NLQ 12 cpi, it is changed to 17.1 cpi.

You may enable/disable condensed print using the control panel; the default is Enable. Once you enable condensed print using the control panel, this control code sets condensed print to enabled until it is canceled by control code DC2, a printer reset, or a new print mode (ESC I) control code.

Example The following sample shows condensed character printing and reset.

Condensed Print, Cancel

ASCII Code DC2

Hex Code 12

Dec Code 18

ESC DC2

1B 12

27 18

Purpose Cancels condensed character printing and sets pitch to 10 cpi.

Discussion The Condensed Print Cancel command sets the character pitch to 10 cpi, or 5 cpi if printing is set for double wide.

Example See the SI control code above for an example of Condensed

Print Cancel.

130

Deselect Printer

Deselect Printer

ASCII Code ESC Q 22

Hex Code 1B 51 16

Dec Code 27 81 22

Purpose Stops the printer from processing data received from the host computer.

Discussion This code is for diagnostic use; it instructs the printer to stop processing data received from the host system. In order to resume processing data, the printer must be reset from the host system.

Double Wide Print

ASCII Code ESC W n

Hex Code 1B 57 n

Dec Code 27 87 n

Purpose Selects or cancels double wide (expanded) print.

where n may range from 0 through 255 (hex 00 through hex FF).

If n = 1, 3, 5 ... (any odd value), double wide print is selected.

If n = 0, 2, 4 ... (any even value), double wide print is cancelled.

Discussion An ESC W code sets or cancels double wide print, as follows:

When expanded print using ESC W is received, all characters print double wide until cancelled by an even parameter hex code.

Double wide print can also be set via the command SO and ESC

SO, double wide print for one line only. An ESC W code overrides these settings.

Example The following sample illustrates expanded character printing and expanded character printing reset.

131

Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes

Double Wide Print (One Line Only)

ASCII Code SO

Hex Code 0E

ESC SO

1B 0E

Dec Code 14

Purpose

27 14

Selects double wide print for one line only.

Discussion This expanded print command is a line-by-line print attribute; when the SO or ESC SO command is received, the current line will be printed double wide and automatically reset. This command can be reset by a paper motion command (FF, LF,

VT, CR), by the DC4 (double wide cancel) code, CAN or ESC W

(double wide print).

Example The following sample illustrates Expanded Print for one line only.

Double Wide Print (One Line Only) Cancel

ASCII Code DC4

Hex Code 14

Dec Code 20

ESC DC4

1B 14

27 20

Purpose Cancels double wide print, if it was set by command SO.

Discussion The DC4 code cancels Double Wide Print command SO. If

Double Wide Print is not enabled, the DC4 code is ignored. A

DC4 code can occur at any place in the datastream and is acted upon immediately.

132

Emphasized Print

Emphasized Print

ASCII Code ESC E

Hex Code 1B 45

Dec Code 27 69

Purpose Selects emphasized character print format.

Discussion When the emphasized print command is received, all characters will be printed in emphasized (bold) print until reset by the

Emphasized Print Reset command or printer reset. Emphasized print reduces the current print speed.

Note The ESC G (page 127) and ESC E commands are equivalent; they produce the same print effect.

Example The following sample illustrates emphasized character printing.

Emphasized Print, Cancel

ASCII Code ESC F

Hex Code 1B 46

Dec Code 27 70

Purpose Cancels emphasized character printing.

Discussion The emphasized print reset command only resets the emphasized print character attribute. See Example for using

ESC E combined with ESC F.

133

Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes

Form Feed

ASCII Code FF

Hex Code 0C

Dec Code 12

Purpose Prints the data in the buffer, advances the paper to the next topof-form, and moves the logical printhead to the first character column.

Discussion Forms length is set by using the control panel or forms length control codes. This code cancels double wide (expanded) characters if set by the SO command. The Form Feed command will react differently when the VFU is active. Refer to Chapter 7 in this manual for further information. The Form Feed command will react differently when the control panel selection “FF Valid at

TOF” is disabled. Refer to the User’s Guide for further information.

Forms Length Set in Inches

ASCII Code ESC C NUL n

Hex Code 1B 43 00 n

Dec Code 27 67 0 n

Purpose Sets the length of forms (paper) in inches.

where n = whole numbers from 1 through 21 to specify the number of inches on a page. (All larger values are ignored.)

Discussion Upon receipt of this code, the current line becomes the first line of the form, and the forms length set becomes the current forms length. Vertical tab positions set below the bottom of the form are ignored; in addition, once a new forms length is set the bottom margin is set to zero.

Line spacing changes do not affect the result of this command. If the forms length is set smaller than the line spacing, a form feed advances the paper position to the next top-of-form position.

Forms length in inches can also be set at the control panel via the LinePrinter+ Form Length menu option (refer to the User’s

Guide ). However, this host control code overrides the control panel setting.

134

Forms Length Set in Lines

Forms Length Set in Lines

ASCII Code ESC C n

Hex Code 1B 43 n

Dec Code 27 67 n

Purpose Sets the length of a form (paper) in lines.

where n = 1 through 168 (hex 01 through hex A8) to specify the number of lines per page at the current line spacing.

Discussion The forms length is defined in inches as the quotient of n divided by the current lines per inch (lpi) setting. Once the forms length has been set, subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the result of this command.

If the forms length is set smaller than the line spacing, a form feed advances the paper position to the next top-of-form position.

If the forms length derived from the quotient of n lines divided by lines per inch is not an exact multiple of the printer dot resolution, the value is adjusted down until the forms length and dot resolution distance match.

Forms length can also be set at the control panel via the

LinePrinter+ Form Length menu option (refer to the User’s

Guide ). However, this host control code overrides the control panel setting.

135

Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes

Initialize Parameters

ASCII Code ESC [ K n1 NUL n2 n3 n4 n5

Hex Code 1B 5B 4B n1 00 n2 n3 n4 n5

Dec Code 27 91 75 n1 0 n2 n3 n4 n5

Purpose Sets the printer’s initial condition.

Discussion This command causes the printer to reset and defines the configuration that will be loaded to the printer during the reset.

Several variables must be specified to define the load configuration, as described below.

Note An ESC[K code can occur at any place in the datastream and is acted upon immediately. All numerical parameters are in the hex 00 through FF range unless stated otherwise.

Only specified parameters are supported. Other values may be ignored or cause unpredictable results, and should be avoided.

n1

The value of n1 defines which of the following n bytes will be included in the command line, as shown in Table 29.

Table 29. n1 Values n1 Hex Value

1

3

4

Function

One byte follows ( n2 )

Three bytes follow ( n2, n3 and n4 )

Four bytes follow ( n2, n3, n4 and n5 )

Note Specifying any value for n1 other than 1, 3, or 4 may cause unpredictable results, and should be avoided.

n2

The 2-digit hexadecimal value for n2 defines the load configuration for the printer. The Proprinter III XL supports six values for this parameter: 00, 01, 04,

05, 254, and 255 (hex 00, 01, 04, 05, FE, and FF). Any other value will be ignored.

If any of the six supported values is entered for the n2 parameter, then the printer will reset to the factory default configuration. Configuration parameters defined by command bytes n4 and n5 , if present, will override conflicting factory default values.

136

Initialize Parameters

n3

Parameter n3 is provided for compatibility with the Proprinter III XL printer control language standard. You may define any value for this parameter. (For

Proprinters, this bit must define the attached printer as either Proprinter, value

03, or Proprinter III XL, value 22 [hex 16].)

n4 and n5

Parameter bytes n4 and n5 allow you to define several configuration parameters that will override conflicting factory default and memory-based configuration values when the printer is reinitialized. Possible values for n4 and n5 are listed in Table 30 and Table 31, respectively.

Note In addition to the formatting from bytes n4 and n5 , this command sets the current line as top-of-form. It also clears vertical tabs and sets the horizontal tabs at every eight columns, starting at column 9.

n4 Bit

5

4

7

6

Function

Process this byte

Reserved n/a

Line Feed =

Table 30. n4 Values

OFF (0)

Process

Reserved n/a

LF

3

2

1

0

Carriage Return =

Set forms length

Slashed Zero

Character set

CR

11 inches

Disable

1 (A)

ON (1)

Ignore

Reserved n/a

LF + CR

(add CR with each LF)

CR + LF

(add LF with each CR)

12 inches

Enable

2 (B)

137

Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes

1

0

3

2 n5 Bit

7

6

5

4

Function

Process this byte

Code page

Unidirectional

Printing

12 cpi compressed to 20 n/a

Form feed at TOF

Print Width

Sheet feeder

Table 31. n5 Values

OFF (0)

Process

437

Bidirectional

20 n/a

Enable

13.2 inches n/a

ON (1)

Ignore

850

Unidirectional

12 n/a

Ignore

8 inches n/a

Line Feed

ASCII Code LF

Hex Code 0A

Dec Code 10

Purpose Prints the data in the buffer (if any) and advances the paper one line at the current line space setting.

Discussion If configured for LF equals new line (LF = CR + LF), the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 of the new line.

Otherwise, the logical print head does not move when configured for LF function only (LF = LF only). The LF function cancels double wide (expanded) characters if set by the SO command.

Line feed can occur at any place in the datastream and is acted upon immediately.

138

Line Feed n/216 Inch (One Line Only)

Line Feed n/216 Inch (One Line Only)

ASCII Code ESC J n

Hex Code 1B 4A n

Dec Code 27 74 n

Purpose Advances the vertical character position only.

n /216 inch for one line where n = 1 through 255 (hex 01 through hex FF).

Discussion The n /216-inch line feed control code is effective for one line only. All single-line-only print attributes are canceled.

If the emulation is configured for LF equals newline

(LF=CR+LF), the paper advances one line at the n line spacing setting and the logical print head is positioned at character column 1.

The paper position moves only in multiples of the current dot row spacing. If the distance to move is other than a multiple of the current dot row spacing, the remainder is added to the next paper motion command.

Small values of n may result in overlapping lines. Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated

(Double High), Superscript, or Subscript characters are used on the same line. Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities will not overlap.

Example The following example illustrates n /216-inch line spacing.

139

Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes

Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)

ASCII Code ESC 0

Hex Code 1B 30

Dec Code 27 48

Purpose Specifies continuous line spacing at 1/8-inch increments (8 lpi).

Discussion When the 1/8-inch line spacing control code is received, all lines will be printed at 8 lpi until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset.

Example The following example illustrates 1/8-inch line spacing.

Line Spacing 7/72 Inch (10.3 lpi)

ASCII Code ESC 1

Hex Code 1B 31

Dec Code 27 49

Purpose Specifies the line spacing at 7/72-inch (10.3 lpi) increments.

Discussion When the 7/72-inch line spacing control code is received, all lines will be printed at the 7/72-inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. The control code line spacing selection will override the control panel line spacing setting, and the message display will reflect the line spacing as

10.3 lines per inch.

Caution should be used when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated (Double High),

Superscript, or Subscript; overlapping lines may occur.

Example The following example illustrates 7/72-inch line spacing.

140

Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Executes)

Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Executes)

ASCII Code ESC 2

Hex Code 1B 32

Dec Code 27 50

Purpose ESC 2 sets line spacing to 6 lpi or as set by ESC A.

Discussion ESC 2 asserts n /72-inch line spacing as set by ESC A (page

142). If no distance has been set by ESC A, the distance is 1/6 inch.

The control code line spacing selection will override the control panel line spacing setting.

Example The following example illustrates 1/6-inch line spacing and assumes that a distance has not been set by ESC A.

141

Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes

Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Storage)

ASCII Code ESC A n

Hex Code 1B 41 n

Dec Code 27 65 n

Purpose Stores a line spacing of n /72-inch increments.

where n = 1 through 255 (hex 01 through hex FF).

All others values are ignored.

Discussion This control code stores a value for line spacing of n /72 inch.

The ESC 2 control code (described on page 141) executes the line spacing stored by the preceding ESC A, until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. A control code line spacing overrides a control panel line spacing setting. (The control panel display shows line spacing in lines per inch.)

Small values of n may result in overlapping lines. Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated

(Double High), Superscript, or Subscript characters are used on the same line. Common values of n are listed in Table 32.

Table 32. Line Spacing values n

24

18

12

9

8

6

Line Spacing

3 lpi

4 lpi

6 lpi

8 lpi

9 lpi

12 lpi

Example The following example illustrates 20/72-inch line spacing.

142

Line Spacing n/216 Inch

Line Spacing n/216 Inch

ASCII Code ESC 3 n

Hex Code 1B 33 n

Dec Code 27 51 n

Purpose Specifies the line spacing at n /216-inch increments.

where n = 1 through 255 (hex 01 through hex FF).

Discussion When the n /216-inch line spacing control code is received, all line feeds following will be at n /216-inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. The control code line spacing selection will override the control panel line spacing setting.

The vertical character position moves only in multiples of the current dot row spacing. If the distance to move is other than a multiple of the current dot row spacing, the remainder is added to the next paper motion command.

Caution should be used when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated (Double High),

Superscript, or Subscript; overlapping lines may occur.

Example The following example illustrates n /216-inch line spacing.

143

Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes

Margin, Bottom

ASCII Code ESC N n

Hex Code 1B 4E n

Dec Code 27 78 n

Purpose Sets the bottom margin.

Discussion n defines the number of lines above the bottom of the form to set as the bottom margin. n has a range from 1 through 255 (hex 01 through hex FF). The actual margin in inches is the quotient of n divided by the current lines per inch (lpi).

If a line feed command causes the active position to advance below the bottom margin, the paper advances to the top of the next form. If the bottom margin set is equal to or greater than the form length, printing is only allowed on the top line of each page.

If the forms length is changed by the ESC C code (Forms Length sequence), the bottom margin is set to zero.

The bottom margin setting can also be selected from the control panel; however, the host control code will override the control panel setting. Any vertical tabs set within the bottom margin zone will be ignored.

Margin Cancel, Bottom

ASCII Code ESC O

Hex Code 1B 4F

Dec Code 27 79

Purpose Resets the bottom margin to zero.

Margins, Horizontal

ASCII Code ESC X n m

Hex Code 1B 58 n m

Dec Code 27 88 n m

Purpose where

Sets left and right margins in character positions.

n = left margin position m = right margin position

Discussion The values of n and m must be in the range from 0 through 255

(hex 00 through hex FF). The margins are measured in character positions at the current characters per inch (cpi). n is the column number from the left edge of the paper. For example, n = 5 means that the line starts at column number 5.

Therefore it has a left margin of 4.

m is the column number from the right edge of the paper. For example, m = 56 means that the line ends on column 80 if the form width is 136.

144

Overscoring

Overscoring

ASCII Code ESC _ n

Hex Code 1B 5F n

Dec Code 27 95 n

Purpose Enables or disables automatic overscoring of all characters.

where n may range from 0 through 255 (hex 00 through hex FF).

n = 0, 2, 4... disables automatic overscoring (any even value from hex 00 through hex FE) n = 1, 3, 5... enables automatic overscoring (any odd value from hex 01 through hex FF)

Discussion When automatic overscore is enabled, all characters, including spaces, are overscored. Full-height graphics characters are not overscored.

Example The following sample illustrates automatic overscoring and overscoring reset.

Print All Characters

ASCII Code ESC \ n1 n2

Hex Code 1B 5C n1 n2

Dec Code 27 92 n1 n2

Purpose where

Prints the characters assigned to code points as characters, rather than interpreting the code values as commands.

n1 + 256 n2 defines the number of data bytes to follow n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )

(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256

(quotient of division)

Discussion The number of data bytes specified by n1 + 256 n2 will print as text. Valid numerical parameters are in the range 0 through 255

(hex 00 through hex FF). Data values that do not correspond to standard ASCII codes will print as spaces.

145

Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes

Print Next Character

ASCII Code ESC ^ n

Hex Code 1B 5E n

Dec Code 27 94 n

Purpose Prints the graphic character assigned to n , rather than interpreting the code value as a command.

Discussion This command may appear anywhere in the data stream, and will be acted upon immediately. Valid numerical parameters are in the range 0 through 255 (hex 00 through hex FF).

Print Mode

ASCII Code ESC I n (uppercase “i”)

Hex Code 1B 49 n

Dec Code 27 73 n

Purpose Selects a print mode.

Discussion This control code selects a print mode from among the choices listed in Table 33.

Table 33. Print Mode Values n Hex

04

05

06

07

00

01

02

03

0B

0F

Function

DP 10 cpi

HS 12 cpi

NLQ Sans Serif 10 cpi

NLQ 10 cpi

DP 10 cpi

HS 12 cpi

NLQ Sans Serif 10 cpi

NLQ 10 cpi

NLQ Italic Proportional

NLQ Italic 10 cpi

Note

There are several duplicate function values that select the same print quality. These are provided for compatibility with the

Proprinter III XL standard.

If you specify any value other than the ones shown in Table

33, unpredictable results may occur.

146

Print Quality

Print Quality

ASCII Code ESC x n

Hex Code 1B 78 n

Dec Code 27 120 n

Purpose This code selects a print quality.

where n = 0 or 48 (hex 00 or hex 30) selects DP print quality n = 1 or 49 (hex 01 or hex 31) selects NLQ print quality n = 2 or 50 (hex 02 or hex 32) selects HS print quality n = 3 or 51 (hex 03 or hex 33) selects OCR A print quality n = 4 or 52 (hex 04 or hex 34) selects OCR B print quality

Comment When you select NLQ, the font is serif. Print qualities selected with this command override control panel selections. Selecting an OCR print quality overrides any character attributes already set, such as condensed, double-wide, etc. These attributes will not return when another print quality is set. Character attributes set when OCR is selected will be ignored.

Proportional Spacing

ASCII Code ESC P n

Hex Code 1B 50 n

Dec Code 27 80 n

Purpose where

Enables/disables proportional spacing of characters.

n may range from 0 through 255 (hex 00 through hex FF). n = 1, 3, 5...(any odd value) enables proportional spacing n = 0, 2, 4...(any even value) disables proportional spacing

Comment This command is ignored when a non-proportional font is used.

147

Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes

Select Attributes

ASCII Code ESC [ @ n1 NUL NUL NUL n2 n3

Hex Code 1B 5B 40 n1 00 00 00 n2 n3

Dec Code 27 91 64 n1 0 0 0 n2 n3

Purpose Selects double high and double wide attributes, and single or double high line spacing.

Discussion Parameter n1 selects the attributes from n2 and n3 , as follows:

Table 34. Select Attributes n1 Values n1 (Hex)

03

04

Function

Set character height and line feed settings according to the value of n2 . (If n1 = 03, there is no n3 ).

Set character height, line feed, and character settings according to the values of n2 and n3 .

n2 (Hex)

11

12

20

21

22

00

01

02

10

Parameter n2 defines the height attributes, as follows:

Table 35. Select Attributes n2 Values

Function

No change

Set single height characters

Set double height characters

Set single line spacing

Set single height characters and single line spacing

Set double high characters and single line spacing

Set double line spacing

Set single height characters and double line spacing

Set double high characters and double line spacing

148

Set Top-of-Form n3 (Hex)

00

01

02

Parameter n3 defines the width attributes, as follows:

Table 36. Select Attributes n3 Values

Function

No change

Set single wide characters

Set double wide characters

An ESC [ @ code can occur at any place in the datastream and is acted upon immediately.

All numerical parameters are in the hex 00 through FF range unless stated otherwise.

Set Top-of-Form

ASCII Code ESC 4

Hex Code 1B 34

Dec Code 27 52

Purpose Sets the current paper position as the top-of-form.

149

Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes

Superscript/Subscript Printing

ASCII Code ESC S n

Hex Code 1B 53 n

Dec Code 27 83 n

Purpose Selects superscript or subscript printing.

where n may range from 0 through 255 (hex 00 through hex FF).

n = 1, 3, 5 (any odd value), selects subscript printing.

n = 0, 2, 4 (any even value), selects superscript printing.

Discussion When the super/subscript command is received, all characters will be superscript or subscript until reset by the super/subscript reset command or printer reset. Super/subscript print modes are not available for the double high attribute.

You can print both superscript and subscript characters in the same character column by using the Backspace (BS) control code, but these characters will not print when double high printing is in effect.

Note Superscript and subscript characters print at the same size as the current font, shifted up or down relative to the print line.

Example The following sample illustrates superscript/subscript printing.

Superscript/Subscript Printing, Cancel

ASCII Code ESC T

Hex Code 1B 54

Dec Code 27 84

Purpose Cancels superscript and subscript printing (as set by ESC S).

This code can occur at any place in the datastream and is acted upon immediately.

150

Tab, Horizontal

Tab, Horizontal

ASCII Code HT

Hex Code 09

Dec Code 09

Purpose Moves the logical printhead right to the next horizontal tab stop.

Discussion Power-on default horizontal tabs are set at every eighth character starting at position 9 (9, 17, 25). If there are no horizontal tabs set or the logical printhead is located at the last character column, the code is ignored and no movement occurs.

If double-wide, double-high attributes are enabled, single-wide character spacing is used. Horizontal tabs are stored as a relative position; therefore, character pitch changes will change horizontal tab positions. Refer to the ESC D control code description (page 151) to set new tab positions.

Tab Set/Clear, Horizontal

ASCII Code ESC D n1 n2...nk NUL

Hex Code 1B 44 n1 n2...nk 00

Dec Code 27 68 n1 n2...nk 0

Purpose Sets up to 28 horizontal tab positions.

Discussion n1, n2, up to nk denote character column positions for tab stops

(at the current character pitch), where n1 and n2 represent the first two tab stops and nk is the final tab stop. You may specify from 1 up to 28 tab stops (all parameters after 28 are ignored).

The leftmost character column position is 1. The value for each tab stop can range from 1 through 255 (hex 01 through hex FF), inclusive, and all tabs must be specified in ascending order. Any out-of-order symbols are ignored, though the remainder of the sequence is processed.

If you are defining a sequence of tabs, terminate the string with a

00H ( not an ESC D 00H). If you want every column to be set with a horizontal tab, use ESC D 00H. If only one tab position is set and it is beyond the right margin, then every column is also set as a horizontal tab. Any change in character pitch within a line changes the tab positions for the entire line. All control codes that define horizontal distance expressed in units of characters are stored internally in character columns.

Example The following example illustrates horizontal tab setting and accessing.

151

Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes

Tab, Vertical

ASCII Code VT

Hex Code 0B

Dec Code 11

Purpose Prints the data in the buffer and advances the paper to the next vertical tab position.

Discussion In the Proprinter III XL emulation, vertical tab positions are set by control code ESC B and executed by control code VT. In this mode, if vertical tabs are loaded, the paper position moves to the next vertical tab position.

If a vertical tab format is not defined, the paper position is advanced to the next line at the current line spacing. If a vertical tab format is defined but no vertical tab positions are set between the current print position and the end of the form, the paper position is advanced to the top of the next form. The VT code resets all single line print attributes. More information on vertical tabs is provided in the Chapter 7.

If configured for LF = CR + LF (LF equals new line), the character position indicator is positioned at character column 1 of the new line. Otherwise, the character position indicator does not move.

152

Tab Set/Clear, Vertical

Tab Set/Clear, Vertical

ASCII Code ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL

Hex Code 1B 42 n1 n2 ... nk 00

Dec Code 27 66 n1 n2 ... nk 0

Purpose Sets or clears vertical tab positions.

Discussion The physical position on the paper is defined by n and the current line spacing.

where n = vertical tab setting (in lines), and k = number of tabs possible.

The value of n can be defined in the range of 1 through 255 (hex

01 through hex FF), inclusive, while k is defined in the range of 1 through 64 (hex 01 through 40). Any value for k over 64 is ignored. Subsequent line spacing changes affect the tab position. If the value of n exceeds the forms length, that tab position is ignored.

Vertical tab positions are set by the command ESC B and executed by the command VT. The tab positions must be in ascending order, or the emulation ignores the out-of-order symbols. If the ESC B command is followed immediately by hex

00, the vertical tab positions are cleared.

Example The following sample illustrates Vertical Tab Setting. To run the sample, set your printer at top-of-form.

Tabs, Clear All (Return to default)

ASCII Code ESC R

Hex Code 1B 52

Dec Code 27 82

Purpose Clears all horizontal and vertical tab stops.

Discussion When ESC R is invoked, horizontal tab stops reinitialize to every eight columns, starting at column 9 (9, 17, 25). In addition, the vertical tabs are cleared.

153

Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes

Underline

ASCII Code ESC - n

Hex Code 1B 2D n

Dec Code 27 45 n

Purpose Enables or disables automatic underlining of all characters.

Discussion When automatic underline is enabled, all characters, including spaces, are underlined until disabled.

where n may range from 0 through 255 (hex 01 through hex FF).

n = 1, 3, 5 (any odd value) selects underlining.

n = 0, 2, 4 (any even value) cancels underlining.

Example The following sample illustrates automatic underlining and underlining reset.

Unidirectional Printing

ASCII Code ESC U n

Hex Code 1B 55 n

Dec Code 27 85 n

Purpose Sets or cancels unidirectional printing. While this feature reduces print speed by 1/2, the increased print quality will improve the readability of barcodes and graphics.

Discussion This code sets or cancels unidirectional printing, as follows: where n may range from 0 through 255 (hex 00 through hex FF).

n = 1, 3, 5 (any odd value) selects unidirectional text printing.

n = 0, 2, 4 (any even value) cancels unidirectional text printing.

154

5

Epson FX-1050 Emulation

Overview

This chapter describes the Epson FX emulation host control codes.

“Emulation” refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language. A printer control language is the coding system used to convey, manipulate, and print data. It contains character codes and command sequences that configure the emulation. In this manual, the terms emulation, printer protocol, and printer control language are synonymous.

In Epson FX emulation mode, your printer can print files coded for the Epson

FX printer control language. To select the Epson FX emulation as the active printer emulation, select LinePrinter Plus from the EMULATION menu and

Epson FX from the Printer Protocol menu, as described in the User’s Guide.

The Epson FX emulation provides many configurable parameters. The default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 37. You can modify these parameter values in two ways:

The Epson FX host control codes. An extensive set of Epson FX control code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host computer via the host data stream. Most of this chapter is devoted to describing the Epson FX control code commands.

The printer configuration menus. You can modify a subset of the

Epson FX emulation parameters using the control panel switches and

LCD display, as described in the User’s Guide.

A parameter value set by a host control code generally overrides a value set from the printer’s control panel.

Note Configuration values selected from the menus or via host control codes can be saved to the printer’s NVRAM memory so that they will not be lost when you power off the printer or reset it to the factory defaults. The menu selection for saving a configuration to memory is described in the User’s Guide.

155

Chapter 5 Overview

Epson FX-1050 Default Values and States

The factory settings for the Epson FX-1050 emulation menu options are shown in Table 37. Table 38 lists additional factory settings for parameters provided by the LinePrinter+ formatting menus. (The EMULATION menu options are described in the User’s Guide ). Host control codes can override many of the settings for these menu options.

Table 37. Epson Emulation Menu Option Factory Settings

Characteristic

Define CR Code

Auto LF

Define LF Code

Printer Select

Character Set

20 CPI Condensed

Alt. Set 80-9F

Default Setting

CR = CR

Enable

LF = LF

Disable

Epson Set

Enable

Control Code

156

Epson FX-1050 Default Values and States

Table 38. LinePrinter+ Menu Option Factory Settings

Characteristic

CPI

LPI

Typeface

Proportional Spacing

Bold Print

Italic Print

Slashed Zero

Left Margin

Right Margin

Bottom Margin

Perforation Skip

Form Length

Form Width

Default Setting

10.0

6.0

Data Processing

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

0 columns

0 columns

0 lines

Disable

11.0 inches

279.4 millimeters

66 lines

13.6 inches

345.4 millimeters

136 characters

157

Chapter 5 Overview

Epson Emulation Exceptions and Differences

Because of mechanical differences between your line matrix printer and

Epson printers (moving printhead serial matrix printers), some Epson features are approximated or not supported.

• Epson codes that produce different behavior in your printer are indicated by a “dagger” ( † ) in the Control Code Index.

• The Epson emulation supports the following fonts: DP, NLQ Serif and

Sans Serif, Draft with 10 cpi, 12 cpi and 15 cpi in either condensed or normal widths, and OCR A and OCR B in 10 cpi. Condensed printing at

10 cpi in DP quality maps to 17.1 cpi. Character pitches other than 10 DP cpi map to 20 cpi in DP and 17.1 cpi in NLQ.

• Epson bit-image graphics are supported, including all plotter and CRT densities.

• Many character sets are available, including IBM-PC Graphics (IBM Code

Page 0437) and Epson. You can configure the zero character to contain a slash or no slash.

• The Double Wide print control codes (ESC W, SO) double character width, but not inter-character spacing, unlike the Epson FX-1050. The formulas for total character spacing are as follows:

Epson FX-1050 2 (char + 1 dot + space)

Epson Emulation 2 (char + 1 dot) + space

• The Condensed Print (SI) control code condenses character width but not inter-character spacing, unlike the Epson FX-1050 which condenses both character width and spacing.

• If one or more Backspace control codes follow directly after a Bit Image

Graphics command (ESC K, ESC L, ESC Y, or ESC Z), the printer will backspace into the graphic pattern, the number of dots depending on the current cpi setting. For an Epson FX-1050 printer, one Backspace will send the logical printhead directly to the beginning of the graphics pattern.

• When backspacing over proportionally spaced characters, Epson printers move back the width of each proportional character; this emulation moves back based on the current cpi setting, as if proportional spacing is disabled.

158

Epson Character Sets

Epson Character Sets

BEL Ä

BS CAN

HT

LF

Ü

ä

VT ESC

FF ü

CR

SO

SI

É

é

¥

°

£

ò

ì

è

ù

0

à

DC3

DC4

ø

¨

1

§

ß

DC2

D

E

B

C

F

9

A

7

8

5

6

3

4

Hex

0

1

2

.

+

/

)

*

(

%

&

#

$

"

!

2

SP

=

>

;

<

?

9

:

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

3

0

Epson printers use five character sets. The IBM PC code page, OCR A, OCR

B, and an extensive array of print language sets may be selected from the configuration menus. In addition, there is a unique Epson character set. The

Epson character set (shown in Table 39) is the ASCII character set with the upper, non-ASCII set defined as italics, and the usually unprintable codes designated as international characters.

Table 39. Epson Character Set

M

N

K

L

O

I

J

G

H

E

F

C

D

A

B

4

@

]

^

\

[

_

Y

Z

W

X

U

V

S

T

Q

R

5

P m n k l o j i g h e f c d a b

6

}

~

{

|

DEL y z w x u v s t q r

7 p

Å

å

¤

P t

Ç

Ñ

ñ i

¿

°

£

ì

ò

è

ù

8

à

É

é

ö

ü

¥

Ü

ä

Ä

Ö

æ

ø

ø

¨

ß

Æ

9

§

.

+

,

/

)

*

(

%

&

#

$

"

!

A

SP

=

>

;

<

?

9

:

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

B

0

M

N

K

L

O

I

J

G

H

E

F

C

D

A

B

C

@

]

^

\

[

_

Y

Z

W

X

U

V

S

T

Q

R

D

P m n k l o j i g h f e c d a b

E

}

~

|

{

ø y z w x u v t s q r

F p

The international characters in hex 00-1F and hex 80-9F can be printed when you invoke control code ESC I 1 (see page 173). You may use the Epson configuration menus described in the User’s Guide (or the ESC R control code) to select an international character set.

Normally, these characters are either blank or control codes. The implementation is that the control codes hide the non-italic international characters, even in hex 00 through 1F, and DEL. DEL conceals the non-italic slashed zero.

159

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control

Codes

The remainder of this chapter describes the Epson printer control language codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to the printer, in order to invoke and configure numerous Epson emulation functions.

Format for Control Code Descriptions

The following information is listed for each control code (where applicable):

Name The title or function of the command.

ASCII Code The ASCII mnemonic for the command is shown. Command sequences are in 7-bit (ASCII) form.

Hex Code The code or command sequence in hexadecimal numbers.

Dec Code The code or command sequence in decimal numbers.

Purpose The function(s) of the control code.

Discussion A discussion of the uses of the code or command sequence, including a description of exceptions or limitations to normal use.

Example A sample is provided when it is possible to illustrate the effect of a control code or if a specific syntax is required.

(“dagger”) This symbol means the code produces non-Epson behavior in your printer.

Note If you specify any parameters for a control code other than the ones that are defined in the control code description, unpredictable results may occur.

Escape Sequences

An Epson control code consisting of more than one character is called an escape sequence because the first character in the sequence is always the

ASCII ESCape character. ESC alerts the printer that a special function command (not printable characters) follows.

The format for an Epson escape sequence is:

(ESC)(parameter 1)(parameter 2)...(parameter n )

For example, to select emphasized (offset) print, send the ESC character immediately followed by the E character (do not add a space character):

ASCII: ESC E Hex: 1B 45

160

Attribute Set and Reset Codes

Attribute Set and Reset Codes

Set and reset are another way of saying turn on and turn off, select and deselect, or enable and disable.

Some printer features are set and reset with an escape sequence and the numbers 1 or 0. In such cases you can represent 1 and 0 as hexadecimal codes 01 and 00, or as the ASCII codes for the numerals 1 and 0

(hexadecimal 31 and 30).

NUL Code

NUL (Hex 00) is ignored by the printer and can be used as a fill character; however, it can not be used to add blank spaces since it is not a space character. NUL can also be used as a parameter terminator for the Set

Horizontal Tabs (page 179) or Set Vertical Tabs multibyte control code (page

200).

Note Hex 80 in the 0437 PC Character Set and hex 7F in the

0850 PC Character Set are treated as a NUL; however, these two controls can not be used as parameter terminators.

Switching Between the Emulations

The printer supports several different emulations. PCL-II is the default. P-

Series, Proprinter III XL, and Epson FX-1050 are all a part of the LinePrinter

Plus emulation.

The following command switches from PCL-II to Epson:

ESC%-00002X

To switch from Epson to PCL-II, send the following command to the printer:

ESC|};KD

161

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

The Control Codes

The following index lists the control codes by function, ASCII mnemonic, and page number. Some control code functions can also be selected at the control panel.

= Produces non-Epson behavior in your printer.

FUNCTION ASCII CODE

Vertical Motion and Print Execution

PAGE

Carriage Return

Form Feed

Line Feed

Line Feed n /216 Inch

Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)

Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)

Line Spacing 7/72 Inch

Line Spacing

Line Spacing n /216 Inch n /72 Inch

† Paper Out Detection, Enable

† Paper Out Detection, Disable

Select Vertical Tab Channel

Set Form Length in Inches

Set Form Length in Lines

Horizontal Motion

CR

FF

LF

ESC J n

ESC 2

ESC 0

ESC 1

ESC 3 n

ESC A n

ESC 9

ESC 8

ESC / c

ESC C NUL n

ESC C n

Set Vertical Tabs in Channels ESC b c n1 n2 n3 ... n16 NUL

Skip Over Perforation ESC N

Skip Over Perforation, Cancel ESC O n

Vertical Tab, Execute

Vertical Tab Set/Clear

VT

ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL

184

186

187

192

193

194

196

197

166

175

181

181

182

182

183

183

197

200

200

† Backspace

Carriage Return

Character Pitch 10 cpi

Character Pitch 12 cpi

Horizontal Tab Execute

Horizontal Tab Set/Release

Select/Deselect Proportional

Spacing

Set Absolute Horizontal Print

Position in 1/60 Inch

Set Intercharacter Spacing

in 1/120 Inch

Set Margin, Left

Set Margin, Right

Set Relative Horizontal Print

Position in 1/120 Inch

BS

CR

ESC P

ESC M

HT

ESC D n1 ... nk NUL

ESC p

ESC $ n n1 n2

ESC SP

ESC l

ESC \ n

ESC Q n n n1 n2

165

166

166

166

179

179

191

193

195

195

195

196

162

Emphasis

† Condensed Print

Condensed Print Reset

Double High Print, Set/Reset

Double Strike

Double Strike, Cancel

† Double Wide Print

SI (or ESC SI)

DC2

ESC w

ESC G

ESC H

ESC W n n

† Double Wide Print (One Line) SO (or ESC SO)

Double Wide Print (One Line),

Cancel

Emphasized Print

Emphasized Print, Cancel

Italic Printing

Italic Printing, Cancel

† Superscript and Subscript

Printing

Superscript and Subscript

Printing, Cancel

Underline

DC4

ESC E

ESC F

ESC 4

ESC 5

ESC S

ESC T

ESC - n n

Print Quality Control

† Character Pitch 15 cpi ESC g

† Define a Download Character ESC &

† Master Print Select ESC ! n

† Remove Downloaded CharactersESC NUL n NUL

† Select Print Quality ESC x n

† Select Serif or Sans Serif Font ESC k n

† Select User-Defined Font ESC % n

Character Set Manipulation

Character Set Select:

International Languages

Enable Printing Hex Codes

00-1F and 80-9F

ESC R

ESC I n

Make Hex 80-9F Control Codes ESC 7

Make Hex 80-9F Printable ESC 6

Select Italic Character Set ESC t n n

Data Manipulation

Cancel Line

† Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data

Bytes to 0

Delete Character

Pass Bit 7 from Host

Set Bit 7 of Incoming Data

Bytes to 1

CAN

ESC =

DEL

ESC #

ESC >

The Control Codes

168

169

170

170

171

171

172

172

173

173

180

180

198

198

199

166

169

186

188

191

192

192

165

168

169

187

193

167

173

184

184

190

163

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

Graphics

Graphics, Standard Density

Graphics, Double Density

Graphics, Double Density

Double Speed

ESC K

ESC L n1 n2 n1 n2

ESC Y n1 n2

Graphics, Quadruple Density ESC Z n1 n2

Reassign Graphics Mode

Select Graphics Mode

Select 9-Pin Graphics Mode

ESC ?

ESC *

ESC ^ s m m n1 n2 m n1 n2 d1 ... dk

Miscellaneous Printer Control

Bell BEL

† Cut-Sheet/Paper Feed Control ESC EM n

† Half-Speed Mode, On/Off

Initialize Printer

Printer Select

Printer Deselect

ESC s

ESC @

DC1

DC3

Unidirectional Printing, 1 Line ESC < n

Unidirectional Printing, Set/Reset ESC U n

175

176

177

178

188

189

190

165

169

178

180

187

187

199

199

164

Backspace

Backspace

ASCII Code BS

Hex Code 08

Dec Code 08

Purpose Moves the logical print head to the left one character space toward the first character column.

Discussion Assures that the previous printable characters will be printed, then moves the logical print head one character space to the left at the current pitch setting (which includes double wide and ESC

SP). If the logical print head bumps into the left margin, it stops.

† When backspacing over proportionally spaced characters,

Epson printers move back the width of each proportional character; this emulation moves back based on the current cpi setting, as if proportional spacing is disabled.

† If one or more Backspace control codes follow directly after a Bit

Image Graphics command (ESC K, ESC L, ESC Y, or ESC Z), your printer will backspace into the graphic pattern, the number of dots depending on the current cpi setting. For an Epson FX-

1050 printer, one Backspace will send the logical printhead directly to the beginning of the graphics pattern.

Example Print and backspace two character positions.

Bell

ASCII Code BEL

Hex Code 07

Dec Code 07

Purpose Sounds the printer’s buzzer/beeper.

Discussion The BEL function will sound the buzzer/beeper for 0.2 seconds upon receipt of this command.

Cancel Line

ASCII Code CAN

Hex Code 18

Dec Code 24

Purpose Clears all unprinted data from a line, but does not affect control codes.

Discussion You can use this control code to delete a line, but do so with caution to avoid possible misprinting. This control code cancels the double wide attribute set by SO. No other print attributes are affected. The logical print head goes to the print position it had after the last CR or paper motion command.

165

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

Carriage Return

ASCII Code CR

Hex Code 0D

Dec Code 13

Purpose Prints the data in the buffer, then returns the logical print head to the left margin.

Discussion Subsequent data are shifted 1/2 dot position to the right. A line feed will be appended if the printer is configured from the control panel for CR = CR + LF. When CR = CR + LF, this code cancels all one-line-only emphasis and font controls: double-wide from

SO and ESC SO, and unidirectional printing from ESC <.

Character Pitch 10 CPI

ASCII Code ESC P

Hex Code 1B 50

Dec Code 27 80

Purpose Sets character pitch to 10 characters per inch (cpi).

Discussion This command is normally used to cancel 12 cpi.

Character Pitch 12 CPI

ASCII Code ESC M

Hex Code 1B 4D

Dec Code 27 77

Purpose Sets character pitch to 12 characters per inch (cpi).

Discussion This command is available in all print modes except OCR A and

OCR B.

Character Pitch 15 CPI

ASCII Code ESC g

Hex Code 1B 67

Dec Code 27 103

Purpose Sets character pitch to 15 characters per inch (cpi).

Discussion This command is not defined in Epson FX printers. It is included in this emulation for compatibility with the Okidata KX-P1180 printer. This command is available in all print modes except OCR

A and OCR B.

166

Character Set Select: International Languages

Character Set Select: International Languages

ASCII Code ESC R n

Hex Code 1B 52 n

Dec Code 27 82 n

Purpose Specifies a language overlay that prints the characters shown in

Table 40 when the specified code is invoked.

where n = 0 through 15 (hex 00 through 0E) to determine the language overlay shown in Table 40 below. Epson only defines character sets through hex C.

Table 40. Epson International Character Sets

(Hex)

If n=

International

Character Set Is:

A

B

C

D

E

5

6

7

8

9

2

3

0

1

4

USA

French

German

English (UK)

Danish I

Swedish

Italian

Spanish I

Japanese

Norwegian

Danish II

Spanish II

Latin American I

French Canadian

Latin American II

Hex Codes

23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E

Discussion This control code setting overrides a character set selection made at the control panel.

Example The following example illustrates international character selection using the IBM PC character set.

167

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 0

ASCII Code ESC =

Hex Code 1B 3D

Dec Code 27 61

Purpose Sets the most significant bit (MSB) of all incoming data to 0.

Discussion The MSB is bit number 7. This command only affects text and control code data. Graphics data passes through unchanged.

Some applications always set the MSB of print data to one (1), which results in italic or graphics printing in Epson printers. This command overcomes the problem.

This command does not suppress hex FF from printing.

Condensed Print

ASCII Code SI

Hex Code 0F

Dec Code 15

ESC SI

1B 0F

27 15

Purpose Condenses print pitch as close to 60% of the former character width as possible (up to 20 characters per inch).

Discussion The condensed print command affects all subsequent characters. After the printer receives code SI, all characters are printed condensed (approximately 60 per cent of the width of normal characters) until the printer is reset by ESC M, ESC P,

DC2, a printer reset, or a new print mode control code. SI code

(hex 0F) is equivalent to the ESC SI code. If condensed print is not allowed in the current font, this code is ignored.

Proportionally spaced text cannot be condensed. Proportional spacing overrides condensed printing.

When condensed print is selected, the following character pitches go into effect:

• DP 10 cpi condenses to DP 17.1 cpi. NLQ 10, 12, and 15 cpi condense to

NLQ 17.1 cpi. Draft 10 cpi condenses to Draft 17.1 cpi.

• DP 12 and 15 cpi condense to DP 20. Draft 12 and 15 cpi condense to

Draft 20.

† This control code condenses character width but not intercharacter spacing. An actual Epson FX-1050 printer condenses both character width and spacing. If Condensed Print is combined with Double High (ESC w) printing, only Double High printing will occur.

Example This sample shows condensed character printing and reset.

168

Condensed Print Reset

Condensed Print Reset

ASCII Code DC2

Hex Code 12

Dec Code 18

Purpose Cancels the condensed print mode set by SI, ESC SI, or the control panel.

Discussion This returns the printer to the font that was active before condensed print occurred. Other print attributes are not affected.

Example See the Condensed Print control code (page 168) for an example of Condensed Print Reset.

Cut-Sheet / Paper Feed Control

ASCII Code ESC EM n

Hex Code 1B 19 n

Dec Code 27 25 n

Purpose This code controls the paper feed mechanism on Epson printers.

Discussion The printer ignores this command.

Define a Download Character

ASCII Code ESC &

Hex Code 1B 26

Dec Code 27 38

Purpose Defines a download character.

Discussion The printer ignores this command and removes all downloaded font data from the data stream.

Delete Character

ASCII Code DEL

Hex Code 7F

Dec Code 127

Purpose Deletes the previous character on a line.

Discussion This command is ignored if it occurs immediately after a CR or a paper motion command. Characters truncated due to line length restrictions are not affected by this code.

169

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

Double High Print, Set/Reset

ASCII Code ESC w n

Hex Code 1B 77 n

Dec Code 27 119 n

Purpose Turns double-high character printing on and off. Double-high characters are standard width but twice as high.

where n = 1 or 49 (hex 01 or hex 31) turns double high printing on n = 0 or 48 (hex 00 or hex 30) turns double high printing off

Discussion The OCR A and OCR B fonts cannot be printed in double high.

Note It is recommended to use double Line Feeds and Carriage

Returns when double-high character printing is on (after an

ESC w control code has been sent), or else the printer will overstrike text that has already printed.

If Superscript/Subscript (ESC S) or Condensed Print (SI) is combined with Double High printing, only Double High printing will occur.

Example The following sample illustrates double-high character printing.

Double Strike

ASCII Code ESC G

Hex Code 1B 47

Dec Code 27 71

Purpose Makes text bolder by double printing each dot twice.

Discussion This command makes text bolder by printing each dot twice, the second dot offset to the right of the first by a distance equal to

1/2 the width of a dot, the same as with ESC E.

Example The following sample illustrates double strike character printing.

170

Double Strike, Cancel

Double Strike, Cancel

ASCII Code ESC H

Hex Code 1B 48

Dec Code 27 72

Purpose Turns off the double strike printing set by ESC G or ESC !.

Discussion This control code resets only the double strike print attribute.

Other print attributes, such as double wide printing, are not affected.

Double Wide Print

ASCII Code ESC W n

Hex Code 1B 57 n

Dec Code 27 87 n

Purpose Turns double wide print on and off.

where n = 1 or 49 (hex 01 or hex 31) turns double wide print on n = 0 or 48 (hex 00 or hex 30) turns double wide print off

Discussion When ESC W is received, all characters are printed twice as wide until reset. This command overrides SO, ESC SO, and

DC4. The OCR A and OCR B fonts cannot be printed in double wide.

† This control code doubles character width, but does not double inter-character spacing, unlike the Epson FX-1050. The formulas for total character spacing are as follows:

Epson FX-1050 2(char + 1 dot + space)

Epson Emulation 2(char + 1 dot) + space

Example The following sample illustrates double wide character printing.

171

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

Double Wide Print (One Line)

ASCII Code SO

Hex Code 0E

ESC SO

1B 0E

Dec Code 14

Purpose

27 14

Selects double wide print for one line only.

Discussion This control code is a line-by-line print attribute; when SO or

ESC SO is received, the characters on the current line print twice as wide, then automatically reset.

This control code is cancelled by the DC4 code or by a CR code, as in the Epson FX-1050. It is also cancelled by a paper motion control code (LF, VT, etc.), as in the IBM Proprinter III XL.

† This control code doubles character width, but does not double inter-character spacing, unlike the Epson FX-1050. The formulas for total character spacing are as follows:

Epson FX-1050 2(char + 1 dot + space)

Epson Emulation 2(char + 1 dot) + space

Example The following sample illustrates double wide print for one line only.

Double Wide Print (One Line), Cancel

ASCII Code DC4

Hex Code 14

Dec Code 20

Purpose Cancels the double wide print for one line only selected by SO or

ESC SO.

Discussion This command cancels the double wide print selected by SO or

ESC SO, but does not cancel double wide printing selected by

ESC W or ESC !.

172

Emphasized Print

Emphasized Print

ASCII Code ESC E

Hex Code 1B 45

Dec Code 27 69

Purpose Selects emphasized character print format.

Discussion Emphasized print makes text bolder by printing each dot twice, the second dot offset to the right of the first by a distance equal to 1/2 the width of a dot. This command is available in both DP and NLQ modes.

Example The following sample illustrates emphasized character printing.

Emphasized Print, Cancel

ASCII Code ESC F

Hex Code 1B 46

Dec Code 27 70

Purpose Cancels emphasized character printing selected by ESC E or

ESC !.

Discussion This command is available in both DP and NLQ modes.

Enable Printing Hex Codes 00-1F and 80-9F

ASCII Code ESC I n (uppercase “i”)

Hex Code 1B 49 n

Dec Code 27 73 n

Purpose Permits you to print hex codes 00-1F and 80-9F.

where n = 1 allows hex codes 00-1F and 80-9F to be printable and to be used for user-defined characters.

n = 0 returns hex 00-1F and 80-9F to control codes.

Discussion The printable characters that are included in hex codes 00 through 1F and 80 through 9F are usually not printable in the default state on Epson printers. Sending ESC I 1 enables you to print characters in this range. Sending ESC I 0 returns the codes to non-printable status.

Figure 2 shows the types of characters and their addresses; it is not a sample of printer output.

173

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

B7

BITS

B6

B4 B3 B2

B5

B1

0

0

1

KEY

1 0 1 1

ESC

33

27

1B

OCTAL

DECIMAL

HEX

CHARACTER

B4

B8

B7

BITS

0

B6 0

B5

0

COLUMN

0

B3 B2 B1 ROW

0

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0

1 0 0 1

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 o

˘

ì

à

è

ù

ò

£

BEL

BS

HT

1

1

1

0

0

0

2

2

2

3

3

3

4

4

4

10

8

8

11

9

9

6

6

6

5

5

5

7

7

7

1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

10

11

12

13

14

15

LF

VT

FF

CR

SO

SI

14

12

0 C

15

13

0 D

16

14

0 E

17

15

0 F

12

10

0 A

13

11

0 B

0

0

0

1

1

§

ß

DC2

DC3

DC4

CAN

Ü

ä

ESC

ü

é

¥

¨

ø

Ä

É

20

16

10

21

17

11

22

18

12

23

19

13

24

20

14

30

24

18

31

25

19

25

21

15

26

22

16

27

23

17

34

28

1C

35

29

1D

36

30

1E

37

31

1F

32

26

1A

33

27

1B

Figure 2. Epson Printable Codes (Hex 00-1F and 80-9F)

B8

B7

B6

B5

BITS

B4 B3 B2 B1

ROW

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0

1 0 0 1

1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

˘

ì

ò

o

£

¡

¿

Ñ

ñ

¤

P t

Å

å

ç

203

131

83

204

132

84

207

135

87

210

136

88

205

133

85

206

134

86

211

137

89

214

140

8C

215

141

8D

216

142

8E

217

143

8F

212

138

8A

213

139

8B

1

0

0

0

COLUMN

8

à

è

ù

200

128

80

201

129

81

202

130

82

1

0

0

1

¨

§

ß

Æ

æ

Ø

ø

Ä

Ö

Ü

ä

ö

ü

É

é

¥

9

223

147

93

224

148

94

227

151

97

230

152

98

225

149

95

226

150

96

231

153

99

220

144

90

221

145

91

222

146

92

234

156

9C

235

157

9D

236

158

9E

237

159

9F

232

154

9A

233

155

9B

174

Form Feed

Form Feed

ASCII Code FF

Hex Code 0C

Dec Code 12

Purpose Prints the data in the buffer, if any, then moves the paper to the top of the next form.

Discussion The logical print head moves to the left margin. This code cancels all one-line-only emphasis and font controls: doublewide from SO and ESC SO, and unidirectional printing from ESC

<.

Graphics, Standard Density

ASCII Code ESC K n1 n2

Hex Code 1B 4B n1 n2

Dec Code 27 75 n1 n2

Purpose Selects normal density bit image graphics of 60 dots per inch horizontally and 72 dots per inch vertically.

where ( n1 + 256 n2 ) defines the number of data bytes to follow.

DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.

n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )

(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256 (quotient of division)

Note The DATA can be expressed in a CHR$(DATA) format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied, especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required.

“DATA” consist of 8-bit dot columns, with the MSB at the top, and “1” bits producing dots. For more information, refer to

Chapter 6.

Discussion You can change graphics density with the ESC ? command.

Example The following example produces a pattern of standard density bit image graphics. The 9 data-bit pattern is repeated 27 times.

Compare this example to the double density and quadruple density examples.

175

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

Graphics, Double Density

ASCII Code ESC L n1 n2

Hex Code 1B 4C n1 n2

Dec Code 27 76 n1 n2

Purpose Selects double density bit image graphics of 120 dots per inch horizontally and 72 dots per inch vertically.

where ( n1 + 256 n2 ) defines the number of data bytes to follow.

DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.

n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )

(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256 (quotient of division)

Note The DATA can be expressed in a CHR$(DATA) format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied, especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required.

“DATA” consist of 8-bit dot columns, with the MSB at the top, and “1” bits producing dots. For more information, refer to

Chapter 6.

Discussion Double density printing reduces print speed to half that of normal density printing. You can change graphics density with the ESC

? command. This feature is widely used to move the print head precisely, by printing blank dot columns.

Example The following example produces double density bit-image graphics of the pattern used in the standard density bit-image mode example. The amount of data must be doubled for double density (the data are used 54 times rather than 27).

176

Graphics, Double Density Double Speed

Graphics, Double Density Double Speed

ASCII Code ESC Y n1 n2

Hex Code 1B 59 n1 n2

Dec Code 27 89 n1 n2

Purpose Selects double density, double speed bit-image graphics of 120 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically.

where ( n1 + 256 n2 ) defines the number of data bytes to follow.

DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.

n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )

(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256 (quotient of division)

Note The DATA can be expressed in a CHR$(DATA) format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied, especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required.

“DATA” consist of 8-bit dot columns, with the MSB at the top, and “1” bits producing dots. For more information, refer to

Chapter 6.

Discussion This mode prints double density with no adjacent dots. It is similar to ESC L, except that if the graphics data contain horizontally adjacent dots, the data may print incorrectly. This feature is widely used to move the print head precisely, by printing blank dot columns.

Example The following example produces a double density, double speed graphic image of the pattern used in the standard density example. The amount of data must be doubled for double density (the data are used 54 times rather than 27).

177

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

Graphics, Quadruple Density

ASCII Code ESC Z n1 n2

Hex Code 1B 5A n1 n2

Dec Code 27 90 n1 n2

Purpose Selects Quadruple Density Bit Image graphics of 240 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically.

where ( n1 + 256 n2 ) defines the number of data bytes to follow.

DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.

n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )

(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256 (quotient of division)

Note The DATA can be expressed in a CHR$(DATA) format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied, especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required.

“DATA” consist of 8-bit dot columns, with the MSB at the top, and “1” bits producing dots. For more information, refer to

Chapter 6.

Discussion This mode is similar to ESC L, except that four dot columns are printed in the space normally taken by two columns. You can change graphics density with the ESC ? command.

Example The following example produces quadruple density graphics of the pattern used in the standard density example. The amount of data must be quadrupled for quadruple density (the data are used 108 times rather than 27).

Half Speed Mode, On/Off

ASCII Code ESC s n

Hex Code 1B 73 n

Dec Code 27 115 n

Purpose Reduces printer speed 50% where n = 1 or 49 (hex 00 or 30) turns half speed mode off n = 0 or 48 (hex 01 or 31) turns half speed mode on

Discussion This is simulated in your printer by unidirectional printing.

178

Horizontal Tab Execute

Horizontal Tab Execute

ASCII Code HT

Hex Code 09

Dec Code 09

Purpose Moves the logical print head to the next horizontal tab stop.

Discussion Power-on default horizontal tabs are set at every eighth character at the current character spacing. Tab positions are not affected by a change of font or character width. Blank spaces between HT stops are underlined in underline mode.

Horizontal Tab Set/Release

ASCII Code ESC D n1 ... nk NUL

Hex Code 1B 44 n1 ... nk 00

Dec Code 27 68 n1 ... nk 0

Purpose Sets up to 32 horizontal tab positions.

where n1 through n32 specify the character column of the tab positions.

CHR$(0) is the sequence terminator. ESC D 0 clears all tabs.

Discussion The values of n must be listed in ascending order or they are ignored. Tabs greater than 32 or those positioned beyond the right margin are ignored. The physical tab position is the product of n and the current cell width (1/pitch), excluding double wide.

After the tabs are set, HT moves the logical print head to the next tab stop. Sending ESC @ initializes the printer and resets the tabs to every eighth character column (which is the default).

In proportional mode, the size of 10 CPI characters determines tab positions.

Example The following example illustrates how to set horizontal tabs.

179

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

Initialize Printer

ASCII Code ESC @

Hex Code 1B 40

Dec Code 27 64

Purpose Resets all print-related parameters to the power-up configuration.

Discussion Restores the power-up values and clears the print buffer of printable data on the line preceding the command. Current position is set as top-of-form.

Font, international language selection, forms length, skip-over perforation, and character pitch are reset to their power-up values.

Character-by-character and line-by-line attributes are canceled.

All channels of the vertical format unit are cleared.

This command resets the horizontal tabs to every eighth character column. Interface parameters and printer protocol selection are not affected.

Italic Printing

ASCII Code ESC 4

Hex Code 1B 34

Dec Code 27 52

Purpose Turns on italic character printing.

Discussion Character graphics (IBM graphic set hex B0 through DF and F0 through FE) cannot be italicized. Italic printing will reduce throughput.

Italic Printing, Cancel

ASCII Code ESC 5

Hex Code 1B 35

Dec Code 27 53

Purpose Turns off italic character printing.

180

Line Feed

Line Feed

ASCII Code LF

Hex Code 0A

Dec Code 10

Purpose Prints the data in the buffer (if any) and advances the vertical character position a distance of one line at the current line spacing.

Discussion The logical print head keeps the same distance from the margin.

The current line is printed and the logical printhead moves down a distance equal to the current line spacing. If there are no dots, paper moves and no printing occurs. When possible, successive line feeds are accumulated and moved at once.

This code cancels all one-line-only emphasis and font selections: double-wide from SO and ESC SO, and unidirectional printing from ESC <.

Line Feed n/216 Inch

ASCII Code ESC J n

Hex Code 1B 4A n

Dec Code 27 74 n

Purpose where

Immediately advances the paper n n /216 inch.

= 0 through 255 (hex 00 through hex FF).

Discussion n = 0 is ignored. Paper movement occurs in multiples of 3/216 inch. This command produces an immediate line feed but does not affect line spacing or produce a carriage return. Any oneline-only print attributes in effect are canceled.

Small values of n may result in overlapping lines. Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as double high, superscript, or subscript characters are used on the same line.

Example The following example illustrates n /216-inch line spacing.

181

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)

ASCII Code ESC 2

Hex Code 1B 32

Dec Code 27 50

Purpose Sets the line spacing to 1/6 inch (6 lpi) for subsequent line feeds.

Discussion The 2 is ASCII character 2, not hex 2.

When ESC 2 is received, all lines are printed at 6 lpi until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset.

This control code overrides line spacing set at the control panel.

Example The following example illustrates 1/6-inch line spacing.

Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)

ASCII Code ESC 0

Hex Code 1B 30

Dec Code 27 48

Purpose Sets the line spacing to 1/8 inch (8 lpi) for subsequent line feeds.

Discussion The 0 is ASCII character 0 (zero), not hex 00. When ESC 0 is received, all lines are printed at 8 lpi until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. This control code overrides line spacing set at the control panel.

Example The following example illustrates 1/8-inch line spacing.

182

Line Spacing 7/72 Inch

Line Spacing 7/72 Inch

ASCII Code ESC 1

Hex Code 1B 31

Dec Code 27 49

Purpose Sets the line spacing to 7/72 inch (10.3 lpi) for subsequent line feeds.

Discussion All lines are printed at the 7/72-inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. This control code overrides line spacing set at the control panel.

Printing speed is reduced if printed lines overlap.

Example The following example illustrates 7/72-inch line spacing.

Line Spacing n/216 Inch

ASCII Code ESC 3 n

Hex Code 1B 33 n

Dec Code 27 51 n

Purpose where

Specifies the line spacing at n n /216-inch increments.

= 1 through 255 (hex 01 through hex FF).

Discussion All line feeds following receipt of this code are at n /216 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. Line spacing set by this control code overrides line spacing setting set at the control panel.

The vertical character position moves only in multiples of the current dot row spacing. If the distance to move is other than a multiple of the current dot row spacing, the remainder is added to the next paper motion command.

Paper movement occurs in multiples of 3/216 only.

Use caution when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated (Double High), Superscript, or

Subscript; overlapping lines may occur. Print speed is reduced if lines overlap.

Example The following example illustrates n /216-inch line spacing.

183

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

Line Spacing n/72 Inch

ASCII Code ESC A n

Hex Code 1B 41 n

Dec Code 27 65 n

Purpose Sets a line spacing of n /72 inch for subsequent line feeds.

where n = 1 through 255 (hex 01 through hex FF).

Discussion When this control sequence is received, all subsequent line feeds are n /72-inch until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. This setting overrides line spacing set at the control panel.

Small values of n may result in overlapping lines. Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated

(Double High), Superscript, or Subscript characters are used on the same line. If lines overlap, printing speed is reduced. Any values set by ESC 3 (line spacing n /216 inch) are replaced.

Example The following example illustrates 20/72-inch line spacing.

Make Hex 80-9F Control Codes

ASCII Code ESC 7

Hex Code 1B 37

Dec Code 27 55

Purpose Selects codes hex 80-9F in the character sets as control codes.

Discussion This is the default when the Epson character set is selected as the default set at the control panel.

Make Hex 80-9F Printable

ASCII Code ESC 6

Hex Code 1B 36

Dec Code 27 54

Purpose Selects codes hex 80-9F in the character sets as printable characters.

Discussion This is the default when the IBM PC character set (code page

0437) is selected as the default set at the control panel.

Figure 3 shows the hex 80-9F printable characters for the Epson character set, and for the IBM PC graphic character set.

184

Make Hex 80-9F Printable

B7

BITS

B6

B4 B3 B2

B5

B1

0

0

1

KEY

1 0 1 1

ESC

33

27

1B

OCTAL

DECIMAL

HEX

CHARACTER

B8

B7

B6

B5

BITS

B4 B3 B2 B1 ROW

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0

1 0 0 1

1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

1

0

0

0

COLUMN

8 o ˘

ì

è

à

ù

ò

£

¡

¿

Ñ

ñ

¤

Å

å

ç

203

131

83

204

132

84

200

128

80

201

129

81

202

130

82

205

133

85

206

134

86

207

135

87

210

136

88

211

137

89

214

140

8C

215

141

8D

216

142

8E

217

143

8F

212

138

8A

213

139

8B

1

0

0

1

¨

§

ß

Æ

æ

Ø

ø

Ä

Ö

Ü

ä

ö

ü

É

é

¥

9

223

147

93

224

148

94

220

144

90

221

145

91

222

146

92

225

149

95

226

150

96

227

151

97

230

152

98

231

153

99

234

156

9C

235

157

9D

236

158

9E

237

159

9F

232

154

9A

233

155

9B

B8

B7

BITS

B6

B5

B4 B3 B2 B1 ROW

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0

1 0 0 1

1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

1

0

0

0

COLUMN

8

203

131

83

204

132

84

200

128

80

201

129

81

202

130

82

205

133

85

206

134

86

207

135

87

210

136

88

211

137

89

214

140

8C

215

141

8D

216

142

8E

217

143

8F

212

138

8A

213

139

8B

Epson USA Character Set IBM 437 Code Page

Figure 3. Epson Printable Codes (Hex 80-9F)

1

0

0

1

9

223

147

93

224

148

94

220

144

90

221

145

91

222

146

92

225

149

95

226

150

96

227

151

97

230

152

98

231

153

99

234

156

9C

235

157

9D

236

158

9E

237

159

9F

232

154

9A

233

155

9B

185

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

Master Print Select

ASCII Code ESC ! n

Hex Code 1B 21 n

Dec Code 27 33 n

Purpose Selects or changes print attributes in a single command.

where n = an 8-bit number with the bits set to specify print attributes, as shown in Table 41.

Table 41. Master Print Select Bit Values

Bit No.

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

Bit = 0

10 cpi

Monospaced

Normal

Normal

Normal

Normal

Normal

Normal

Bit = 1

† 12 cpi

† Proportional

Condensed

Emphasized

† Double Strike

Double Wide

Italic

Underlined

Discussion Emphasized is substituted for double strike. Graphics and grey scale characters are not underlined. Proportional spacing overrides condensed or 12 cpi printing if both are selected.

Paper Out Detection, Enable

ASCII Code ESC 9

Hex Code 1B 39

Dec Code 27 57

Purpose Asserts a paper out condition immediately when the end of the paper supply is sensed.

Discussion The printer decodes and ignores this command.

186

Paper Out Detection, Disable

Paper Out Detection, Disable

ASCII Code ESC 8

Hex Code 1B 38

Dec Code 27 56

Purpose Enable printing to the end of the paper supply when a paper out condition is sensed.

Discussion The printer decodes and ignores this command.

Pass Bit 7 from Host

ASCII Code ESC #

Hex Code 1B 23

Dec Code 27 35

Purpose Passes bit 7 (the eighth and most significant bit) whether it is 1 or 0, thereby cancelling ESC > and ESC =.

Discussion This command affects only text and control code data; bit 8 of graphics data is always passed through.

Printer Select

ASCII Code DC1

Hex Code 11

Dec Code 17

Purpose Places printer in the selected state.

Discussion The configuration parameter Printer Select must be set to

Enable. Refer to the User’s Guide for information about this menu option.

This control code allows the printer to receive and print data from the host if it was deselected by DC3. If the printer was not deselected by DC3, this code is ignored.

Printer Deselect

ASCII Code DC3

Hex Code 13

Dec Code 19

Purpose Places printer in the deselected state.

Discussion The configuration parameter Printer Select must be set to

Enable. Refer to the User’s Guide for information about this menu option.

When the printer receives this command it ignores data until a

DC1 (Printer Select) command is received.

187

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

Reassign Graphics Mode

ASCII Code ESC ? s m

Hex Code 1B 3F s m

Dec Code 27 63 s m

Purpose Changes one graphics mode to another.

Discussion s is character K, L, Y, or Z, which is changed to mode m (0-7) from Table 42 (page 189). Thereafter, sending data to the bit image command makes the data print according to the graphics mode you select with m.

Remove Downloaded Characters

ASCII Code ESC : NUL n NUL

Hex Code 1B 3A 00 n 00

Dec Code 27 58 0 n 0

Purpose Erases all downloaded characters.

Discussion The printer ignores this command but removes all data sent.

188

Select Graphics Mode

Select Graphics Mode

ASCII Code ESC * m n1 n2

Hex Code 1B 2A m n1 n2

Dec Code 27 42 m n1 n2

Purpose Turns on 8-pin bit image graphics mode graphics modes available.

m . Table 42 charts the

Discussion The total number of columns = n1 + 256 n2.

n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )

(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256 (quotient of division)

This command does not suppress hexadecimal FF from printing.

Table 42. Epson Graphics Modes m Option

Alternate

Code

Density*

(dots per inch)

Resolution**

(dots per inch)

0

1

Single density

Double density

ESC K

ESC L

60

120

120

120

1

2 High-speed double density ESC Y 60

120

2

3

6

7

4

5

Quadruple density

CRT I

Plotter (1:1)

CRT II

Double density plotter

ESC Z none none none none

120

80

72

90

144

240

1,2,3

160

144

180

144

1

1

Prints at half speed.

2

Data can be sent incorrectly. In these modes, no dots can be closer horizontally than the current font dot density. Sending incorrect data does not damage the printer.

3

240 dpi is simulated by combining the dots from two adjacent columns into one 120 dpi dot column.

* Number of horizontal dots per inch the printer can make.

** Number of dot columns available.

189

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

Select Italic Character Set

ASCII Code ESC t n

Hex Code 1B 74 n

Dec Code 27 116 n

Purpose Selects the italics characters from hex 80 through hex FF, or selects the graphics characters from hex 80 through hex FF.

where n = hex 01 selects the graphics character set n = hex 00 selects the italics character set

Discussion The graphics character set is the IBM Graphics Code Page 437.

Select 9-Pin Graphics Mode

ASCII Code ESC ^ m n1 n2 d1 ... dk

Hex Code 1B 5E m n1 n2 d1 ... dk

Dec Code 27 94 m n1 n2 d1 ... dk

Purpose Turns on 9-pin bit image graphics mode.

Discussion m defines the plot density as shown in Table 42 on page 189.

n1 + 256 n2 = The total number of columns.

n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )

(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256 (quotient of division)

This mode requires two bytes of graphic data for every column of print. Each column is sent as a pair: d1, d3, ... d ( k -1) set the top

8 bits of a normal dot column, just like ESC K; d2, d4, ... dk set the ninth dot in the column (the most significant bit) just below the bottom-most dot of columns d1, d3, ... d ( k -1).

190

Select Print Quality

Select Print Quality

ASCII Code ESC x n

Hex Code 1B 78 n

Dec Code 27 120 n

Purpose Selects print quality.

where n may be in the range from 0 through 4. Values in the range

5-255 are invalid.

n = 0 or 48 (hex 00 or hex 30) selects DP print quality n = 1 or 49 (hex 01 or hex 31) selects Near Letter Quality (NLQ) n = 2 or 50 (hex 02 or hex 32) selects HS print quality n = 3 or 51 (hex 03 or hex 33) selects OCR A print quality n = 4 or 52 (hex 04 or hex 34) selects OCR B print quality

Discussion This command overrides control panel print quality selections.

Note Some print attributes (such as condensed, double-wide, etc.) may not return to their previous setting when changing from OCR-A or OCR-B back to another Print Quality. For guaranteed results, all print attributes should be set after the

Print Quality is selected.

Selecting an OCR print quality overrides any character attributes set, such as condensed, double-wide, etc. Setting character attributes when OCR is set may cause unexpected results.

Draft, OCR A, and OCR B print qualities ( n = 2, 3, or 4) are not defined in Epson-FX printers.

Select/Deselect Proportional Spacing

ASCII Code ESC p n

Hex Code 1B 70 n

Dec Code 27 112 n where

Purpose n = 0 = Off n = 1 = On

Turns proportional mode on and off.

191

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

Select Serif or Sans Serif Font

ASCII Code ESC k n

Hex Code 1B 6B n

Dec Code 27 107 n

† Purpose Selects an NLQ font.

where n may range from 0 through 255 (hex 00 through hex FF).

n = 0, 2, 4 .. (any even value), the font selected is a serif NLQ font (Courier, instead of standard Epson Roman).

n = 1, 3, 5 .. (any odd value), the font selected is a sans serif

NLQ font.

Select User-Defined Font

ASCII Code ESC % n

Hex Code 1B 25 n

Dec Code 27 37 n

Purpose Selects a user-defined font.

Discussion The printer ignores this command and removes all font data sent from the data stream.

Select Vertical Tab Channel

ASCII Code ESC / c

Hex Code 1B 2F c

Dec Code 27 47 c

Purpose Selects a vertical tab channel set by ESC b.

where c = 0 through 7.

Discussion Subsequent VT (Hex 0B) commands use tab table specified by c . If no tab table is selected, channel 0 is used.

192

Set Absolute Horizontal Print Position in 1/60 Inch

Set Absolute Horizontal Print Position in 1/60 Inch

ASCII Code ESC $ n1 n2

Hex Code 1B 24 n1 n2

Dec Code 27 36 n1 n2

Purpose Moves the logical print head to an absolute horizontal print position, using 1/60 inch increments.

where ( n1 + [256 n2 ]) / 60 = the unsigned distance in inches from the left margin. n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )

(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = Number of DATA bytes) / 256 (quotient of division)

Discussion If the distance goes beyond right margin, the sequence is ignored.

Set Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 1

ASCII Code ESC >

Hex Code 1B 3E

Dec Code 27 62

Purpose Sets the most significant bit (MSB) of all incoming data to 1.

Discussion The MSB is bit number 7. This command only affects text and control code data. Graphics data pass through unchanged.

Set Form Length in Inches

ASCII Code ESC C NUL n

Hex Code 1B 43 00 n

Dec Code 27 67 0 n

Purpose where

Sets form length to n inches.

n = whole numbers from 1 through 24 to specify the number of inches on a form.

Discussion Upon receipt of this code, the current line becomes the first line of the form, and the form length set becomes the current forms length. Vertical tab positions set below the bottom of the form are ignored. Forms length is defined in inches; therefore, subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the result of this command.

Values of n greater than 24 are ignored.

When forms length is set by an ESC C sequence, the skip-over perforation set by ESC N is cancelled.

This control code overrides forms length set at the control panel.

193

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

Set Form Length in Lines

ASCII Code ESC C n

Hex Code 1B 43 n

Dec Code 27 67 n

Purpose Sets the form length by lines.

where n = 1 through 192 (hex 01 through C0) to specify the number of lines per form at the current line spacing.

Discussion The forms length is set to the number of lines defined by the quotient of n divided by the current lines per inch so that the units are in inches.

The current line becomes the first line of the form. The forms length is always defined in inches; therefore, changing the lpi after this control code has been issued does not change the forms length.

If the calculated forms length in lines is not an exact multiple of the target machine dot size, the forms length value will be adjusted down to the next possible multiple.

When forms length is set by an ESC C sequence, the skip-over perforation set by ESC N is cancelled.

194

Set Intercharacter Spacing in 1/120 Inch

Set Intercharacter Spacing in 1/120 Inch

ASCII Code ESC SP n

Hex Code 1B 20 n

Dec Code 27 32 n

Purpose Permits character spacing adjustments in 1/120 inch increments.

where n = 0 through 127 (hex 00 through 7F).

Set Margin, Left

ASCII Code ESC l n (lowercase “L”)

Hex Code 1B 6C n

Dec Code 27 108 n where n = number of columns from the left edge of the physical page to the beginning of the print line; n = 1 through 232 (hex 00 through hex E8)

Purpose Sets the left margin to n columns in the current font.

Discussion Be sure to use the alphabetic lowercase “L” (as in left) rather than the numeral “1” (one) for this command. The number of inches of margin does not vary if the font, character width, or horizontal dot density changes. This command automatically clears and resets horizontal tabs to every eight characters. The smallest possible space between the left and right margins is the width of one double-wide, 10 cpi character. If a margin control code violates this minimum distance, it is ignored. Settings in proportional mode are treated as 10 CPI.

Set Margin, Right

ASCII Code ESC Q n

Hex Code 1B 51 n

Dec Code 27 81 n where n = number of columns from the left edge of the physical page to the end of the print line; n = 1 through 232 (hex 00 through hex E8)

Sets the right margin to n columns at the current character width.

Purpose

Discussion The number of inches of margin does not vary if the font, character width, or horizontal dot density changes. This command automatically clears and resets horizontal tabs to every eight characters. The smallest possible space between the left and right margins is the width of one-double wide, 10 cpi character. If a margin control code violates this minimum distance, it is ignored. Settings in proportional mode are treated as 10 CPI.

195

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

Set Relative Horizontal Print Position in 1/120 Inch

ASCII Code ESC \ n1 n2

Hex Code 1B 5C n1 n2

Dec Code 27 92 n1 n2

Purpose Moves the logical print head to a relative horizontal print position, using 1/120 inch increments.

Discussion Adds ( n1 + 256 n2 ) / 120 inches to the horizontal position of the logical print head. The number sent is two’s complement, with negative numbers moving to the left. The command is ignored if it would move the logical print head beyond the page margins.

Set Vertical Tabs in Channels

ASCII Code ESC b c n1 n2 n3 ... n16 NUL

Hex Code 1B 62 c n1 n2 n3 ... n16 00

Dec Code 27 98 c n1 n2 n3 ... n16 0

Purpose Assigns vertical tabs to channels selected by ESC /.

where c = 0 through 7 n = 0 through 255 (hex 00 through FF).

n1 through nk specify the line number for the vertical tab(s), up to a maximum of 16 tab positions. NUL must end the sequence.

Discussion Channels are selected by ESC /. The distance of each tab stop from TOF is the current line spacing times the number of lines given in n.

If paper movement is commanded to a value of n greater than the page length, the paper movement command is ignored. The values of n must be in ascending order. If they are not, the sequence up to and including the out of sequence number is ignored. The rest of the load is processed. Skip over perforation is ignored.

You can clear any channel by sending ESC b c NUL, where c is the channel number.

196

Skip Over Perforation

Skip Over Perforation

ASCII Code ESC N n

Hex Code 1B 4E n

Dec Code 27 78 n

Purpose Selects the number of lines (at the current line spacing) for the paper to skip at the bottom of the page.

where n = 1 through 127 (hex 01 through 7F)

Discussion n is the number of lines skipped between the last line printed on one page and the first line on the next page. The actual distance set is the product of n and the current line spacing. If the value of n exceeds the current form length, the skip is set to one line smaller than the form length or to 0, whichever is greater.

Skip over perforation set by this command overrides control panel settings. This feature is canceled by ESC O, ESC C, ESC

C 0.

Skip Over Perforation, Cancel

ASCII Code ESC O

Hex Code 1B 4F

Dec Code 27 79

Purpose Cancels the skip over perforation set by ESC N and resets the bottom margin to zero.

Discussion O is ASCII uppercase o, not zero (0).

197

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

Superscript and Subscript Printing

ASCII Code ESC S n

Hex Code 1B 53 n

Dec Code 27 83 n

Purpose Selects superscript or subscript printing.

where n = NUL (hex 00) or 0 (hex 30) to enable superscript printing n = SOH (hex 01) or 1 (hex 31) to enable subscript printing

Discussion Superscript prints full-sized characters with a baseline higher than the normal characters. Subscript prints full-sized characters with a baseline lower than the normal characters. When the control code is received, all characters are superscript or subscript until reset by ESC T or printer reset. (This differs from the Epson standard, which utilizes half-size characters for superscript and subscript printing.)

You can print both superscript and subscript characters in the same character column by using the Backspace (BS) control code, but these characters will not print when double high printing is in effect.

If Superscript/Subscript is combined with Double High (ESC w) printing, only Double High printing will occur.

Example The following sample illustrates superscript and subscript printing.

Superscript and Subscript Printing, Cancel

ASCII Code ESC T

Hex Code 1B 54

Dec Code 27 84

Purpose Cancels superscript and/or subscript printing as set by ESC S n.

198

Underline

Underline

ASCII Code ESC - n

Hex Code 1B 2D n

Dec Code 27 45 n

Purpose Turns automatic underlining on and off.

where n = NUL (hex 00) or 0 (hex 30) to turn off underlining n = SOH (hex 01) or 1 (hex 31) to turn on underlining

Discussion Spaces are underlined, but graphics and grey scale characters are not.

Example The following sample illustrates underlining.

Unidirectional Printing, 1 Line

ASCII Code ESC <

Hex Code 1B 3C

Dec Code 27 60

Purpose Causes printing to occur from left to right for one line only.

Discussion Printing normally occurs in both directions of shuttle movement.

This command causes the printer to print from left to right for one line. The command is cancelled by a CR.

Unidirectional Printing, Set/Reset

ASCII Code ESC U n

Hex Code 1B 55 n

Dec Code 27 85 n

Purpose where

Causes printing to occur in only one direction of shuttle movement (left to right).

n = NUL (hex 00) or 0 (hex 30) to turn off unidirectional printing n = SOH (hex 01) or 1 (hex 31) to turn on unidirectional printing

Discussion Printing normally occurs in both directions of shuttle movement.

Unidirectional printing slows the printer down approximately

50%, but is sometimes used when very accurate dot placement is desired in graphics.

199

Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes

Vertical Tab, Execute

ASCII Code VT

Hex Code 0B

Dec Code 11

Purpose Advances the logical print head to the next vertical tab position selected by ESC /.

Discussion If no vertical channel was selected, channel 0 is used. If no vertical tabs were set, the paper advances one line.

The logical print head moves to the left margin. If a tab position is on the current line, the paper is moved to the next tab position.

If there are no tab positions between the current line and the end of the form, the paper is moved to the top of the next form.

This code cancels all one-line-only emphasis and font controls: double-wide from SO and ESC SO, and unidirectional printing from ESC <.

Vertical Tab, Set/Clear

ASCII Code ESC B n1 n2 n3...nk NUL

Hex Code 1B 42 n1 n2 n3...nk 00

Dec Code 27 66 n1 n2 n3...nk 0

Purpose Sets up to 16 vertical tab positions.

where n = 1 through 255 (hex 01 through FF).

k = 1 through 16 (hex 01 through 10).

n1 through nk specify the line numbers for the vertical tab(s), up to a maximum of 16 tab positions. NUL must end the sequence

To clear the tab settings, send ESC B NUL (1B 42 00).

Discussion The values of n range from 1 through 255 (hex 01 through FF) and must be in ascending order. The distance of each tab stop from TOF is the current line spacing times the number of lines given in n . If the value of n exceeds the form length, commands to move to that tab position are ignored.

If values of n are not in ascending order, the sequence up to and including the out-of-sequence number is ignored, and the rest of the load is processed. Skip over perforation is ignored.

This command always sets channel 0. You can clear channel 0 by sending ESC B NUL. (See also the channel selection command, ESC /, and the channel loading command, ESC b.)

200

6

Graphics

Overview

This chapter explains how the printer produces graphic images.

The quickest way to produce graphic images is to use one of the many graphics software applications available. Any graphics program that is compatible with the Epson FX, Proprinter XL, or P-Series emulation should provide excellent results.

You can also use the Intelligent Graphics Processor (IGP) Printronix emulation or the Code V Printronix emulation. Both allow you to create and store forms, generate logos, bar codes, expanded characters, and other graphics.

Printing text and characters is the default mode of operation. However, your printer can print graphics.

• When the emulation is in the Proprinter XL or Epson FX protocol mode,

Bit Image graphics is used for graphics printing.

• When the emulation is in the P-Series protocol mode, Odd/Even dot plotting is used for graphics printing.

Each line of graphics data must include a graphics control code to enable the emulation for the desired graphics mode of operation.

Bit Image Graphics

When the printer uses the IBM Proprinter XL or Epson FX emulation, it creates graphics by accepting bit image graphics data.

Note Text and graphics can be mixed on the same line when the printer plots bit images in the Epson or Proprinter XL emulation.

Bit image graphics are created by vertically printing the bit pattern of a series of data bytes. For example, the bit pattern of the ASCII character A (hex 41, decimal 65) is shown in Figure 4. If we rotate this data byte 90 degrees clockwise, we have a vertical data byte with the most significant bit (MSB) at the top. If we then print each 1 (true) bit as a dot, the result is a “bit image” plot of the ASCII character A.

201

Chapter 6 Bit Image Graphics

ASCII character A = Hex 41 = Binary 01000001

MSB : Most Significant Bit

MSB

5

4

3

2

1

8

7

6

MSB

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Figure 4. Vertical Data Byte Pattern

The relationship between the ASCII character, its decimal value, and its bit image plot is shown in Figure 5. All 8 bits of the data byte are used in all fonts, but some fonts have taller and shorter characters. (You may have to adjust the line spacing in order to print without horizontal gaps.) Data bytes are identified by their binary, octal, hexadecimal, or decimal equivalents. These numeric equivalents are combined in data streams to form graphic patterns such as the one illustrated in Figure 6.

ASCII

Character

Decimal

Value

A = 65 =

Binary

Code

Equivalent to

Vertically

Rotated Data

Byte

128

64

32

16

8

4

2

1

MSB

=

Printed

Bit Image

Figure 5. Bit Image Pattern from an ASCII Character

Bit Image plotting is not limited to printable ASCII characters. You can print Bit

Image patterns for any 8-bit data byte with decimal values ranging from 0 through 255. (The ASCII character set is charted in Appendix A.)

202

Designing a Bit Image Pattern

Designing a Bit Image Pattern

A Bit Image pattern is produced in four steps:

1.

On a quadrille pad or graph paper, lay out the graphic pattern you want to print. (See Figure 6.)

2.

Determine the decimal equivalent of each vertical data byte in your pattern. (The sum of the decimal equivalent of each true bit in the vertical data byte is the decimal equivalent of the data byte.)

3.

Write a program to generate the pattern.

4.

Enter and run the program on the host computer.

Decimal

Weights

MSB 128

64

32

LSB

16

8

4

2

1

1st Bit Image Data Byte

2nd Bit Image Data Byte

7th Bit Image Date Byte

73

146

36

255

36

146

73

Decimal

Equivalents

Figure 6. Bit Image Pattern Plan

Bit Image Density

You can print bit image graphics in different dot densities. Select dot densities by sending a control code in the data stream.

Note Every line of graphics data must include the necessary plot mode command so the printer can perform the chosen graphics functions.

Single Density Mode: ESC K

Single density bit image graphics in a Data Processing (DP) print quality are printed at 60 dots per inch (dpi) horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. For NLQ print quality, the horizontal dot density is 90 dpi and vertical dot density is 96 dpi. For High Speed (HS) draft print quality, horizontal dot density is 60 dpi and vertical dot density is 48 dpi.

203

Chapter 6 Bit Image Graphics

Double Density Mode: ESC L

Double density mode prints up to twice the number of dots per inch horizontally in the same space used for single density. The vertical dot density remains the same as in single density mode. Double horizontal density requires twice the number of input data bytes to print the same length line as single density. Printing double density reduces the printing speed by half.

Double Speed - Double Density Mode: ESC Y

When the double density - double speed control code is received, data bytes print at double the current horizontal dot density, but adjacent dots are not printed. Since double density graphics are printed at half speed, double speed

- double density graphics are printed at the same speed as single density graphics. This mode is often used to position a simulated print head precisely by sending blank dot columns.

Quadruple Density Mode: ESC Z

When printing quadruple density graphics, the printer combines adjacent quadruple density bit image bytes. The compounded data are then printed in double density mode.

Bit Image Programming Format

The bit image command format is:

ESC CC n1 n2 DATA where:

ESC

CC the serial matrix SFCC

K, L, Y or Z to select dot density

(K = single, L = double, Y = double density - double speed, Z=quadruple density) n1 (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )

(remainder of devision of number of DATA bytes by

256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256)

(Number of DATA bytes) / 256 (quotient of division) n2

DATA the dot pattern bytes

The syntax of the bit image expression must be correct.

The number of data bytes and the n1, n2 definition must be equal.

Any characters following n1 and n2 are interpreted and plotted as data until the n1, n2 definition is satisfied.

If n1 = n2 = 0, then control codes K, L, Y, or Z are ignored.

The maximum number of data bytes that can be included in the DATA portion of the program statement (when using 132 column paper) varies according to the dot density:

At 60 dpi, single density = 792 bytes double density = 1584 bytes quadruple density = 3168 bytes

204

Bit Image Sample Program

Data that go past the right margin are discarded if automatic line feed is disabled. If automatic line feed is enabled, data that go past the right margin trigger an automatic line feed (LF) and are printed on the next line.

Bit Image Sample Program

The program below, written in BASIC, produces the single density bit image pattern shown in Figure 7. The 7-byte pattern is repeated 40 times.

Depending on the host computer system, it may be necessary to add a width statement to the BASIC program.

10 WIDTH “LPT1:”, 255

20 LPRINT “Single Density Bit Image Graphics”

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);“K”;CHR$(24);CHR$(1);

40 FOR N=1 TO 40

50 RESTORE

60 FOR I=1 TO 7

70 READ R

80 LPRINT CHR$(R);

90 NEXT I

100 NEXT N

110 DATA 73, 146, 36, 255, 36, 146, 73

120 LPRINT

Figure 7. Sample Single-Density Bit Image Graphics

205

Chapter 6 Plot Mode

Plot Mode

Plot mode is available for the P-Series protocol only.

This subsection describes the P-Series compatible odd/even dot Plot mode of operation. The P-Series plot has a rigid format wherein each line of data contains a plot command code, the plot data, and an LF code (hex 0A).

The P-Series codes (hex 04 and 05, respectively) can be placed anywhere on the command line.

When P-Series Plot mode is enabled by an EOT (hex 04) or ENQ (hex 05) code, all control codes except LF, CR, and FF, are ignored. Any control sequence parameter prior to a plot code is acted upon immediately.

If any combination of EOT (hex 04) or ENQ (hex 05) code is received in a single line, the priority of action is:

• EOT (hex 04) takes priority over ENQ (hex 05)

• ENQ has the same priority level and is acted upon in the order received

A printable symbol is defined as any character or command that might cause the head of a serial printer to move away from character column one.

Plot Density

Plot density refers to the number of dots per inch (dpi) printed in a single dot row. Two types of plot density are available with P-Series Plot mode graphics: normal density and high density. The densities can be mixed within the printed page on a dot row-by-row basis, but the two densities cannot be mixed on the same dot row.

Normal density plotting is selected with the odd dot plot control code ENQ

(hex 05). The odd numbered dot columns are addressed to produce a vertical density that varies based on the font selected: 72 dpi vertical for Letter Gothic

(DP), and 144 dpi vertical for Courier (NLQ). Figure 8 illustrates normal density dot plot.

Figure 8. Normal Density Plot

206

Plot Data Byte Format

High density plotting is selected with the even dot plot control code EOT (hex

04) in conjunction with the odd dot plot control code ENQ (hex 05). The odd and even numbered dot columns are addressed to double the horizontal density. The vertical density remains the same in normal and high density plotting, though vertical density is based on the current print mode. Figure 9 illustrates high density plotting.

Figure 9. High Density Plot

Plot Data Byte Format

In P-Series Plot Mode, the format is as follows:

1.

Each data byte specifies six out of twelve plot dot columns.

2.

Using odd dot plot mode, bits 1 to 6 of the data byte address the oddnumbered dot columns; using even dot plot mode, bits 1 to 6 of the data byte address the even-numbered dot columns.

3.

Bit 6 and/or bit 7 of the data byte must be a “1” (or true) bit in the Plot mode.

4.

Bit 8 of the data byte is not used in the Plot mode and may be 1 or 0.

5.

The binary equivalent of the plot data bytes must be known to accurately address specific dot positions.

As shown in Figure 10, a dot is printed at the location addressed by each of bits 1 to 6 in the data byte that is set (1 or true).

207

Chapter 6 Plot Mode

EVEN DOT PLOT DATA BYTE

LSB MSB

BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 BIT 5 BIT 6 BIT 7 BIT 8

1 0 1 0 1 1 0 NOT

USED

2 4 6 8 10 12

NOTE: BIT 6

AND/OR BIT 7

MUST BE 1"

FOR PLOT MODE

DOT COLUMN

#12 OF PREVIOUS

CHARACTER

COLUMN

~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~

~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~

DOT COLUMN #1 OF

NEXT CHARACTER

COLUMN

1 3 5 7 9 11

1 1 1 0 1 1 1 NOT

USED

BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 BIT 5 BIT 6 BIT 7 BIT 8

LSB MSB

ODD DOT PLOT DATA BYTE

NOTE: IN ACTUAL

PRINTING, THESE

TWO ROWS MERGE

TO PRINT ON THE

SAME ROW.

Figure 10. P-Series Plot Data Byte Format

Plot Data Line Format

A plot data line may contain the following plot data bytes: When using 132 column paper, the maximum bytes are 132 for a horizontal dot density of 60 dpi or 198 bytes for a horizontal dot density of 90 dpi. If Auto Line Feed is disabled, any bytes over the maximum are lost. If the maximum is exceeded and Auto Line Feed is enabled, a Line Feed (LF) is forced and the remaining plot data is printed as text on the next line.

The plot mode control code may occur anywhere in the line prior to the line terminator, but plot speed may decrease if it is not at the beginning of the line.

208

Plot Data Line Format

Normal Density Plot

For normal density plot, the plot line contains: Control Code hex 05, plot data bytes, and a Line Terminator (hex 0A or hex 0C). The control sequence for sending the P-Series Normal Density Plot is as follows:

1.

Send the plot command code ENQ (hex 05).

2.

Send the plot data bytes (refer to page 213).

3.

Send a line terminator, either a Line Feed (LF, hex 0A) or a Form Feed

(FF, hex 0C). A Carriage Return (CR) may also be used instead of the LF code, provided the Carriage Return has been configured for Carriage

Return = Carriage Return + Line Feed (CR = CR + LF).

a.

A line feed (hex 0A) used as the line terminator plots the contents of the buffer and advances the paper position a single dot row, based on the vertical density of the current mode.

b.

A form feed (hex 0C) used as the line terminator plots the contents of the buffer and advances the paper to the next TOF.

4.

Regardless of which line terminator code is sent, the emulation will default to the previously selected print mode unless further plot control codes are provided with the data.

Double Density Plot

For double density plot, the plot line contains: Control Code hex 04, plot data bytes, a Line Terminator (hex 0A or hex 0C), Control Code hex 05, plot data bytes, and a Line Terminator. The control sequence for sending P-Series

Double Density Plot is as follows:

1.

Send the even dot plot control code EOT (hex 04), followed by plot data bytes (refer to page 213).

2.

Send a line terminator, which causes the emulation to plot the data bytes; the paper position is not advanced in Double Density Plot; the emulation now waits for the second plot command and plot data bytes.

3.

Send the odd dot plot control code ENQ (hex 05) and a second line of data, followed by a line terminator.

a.

A line feed (hex 0A) used as the line terminator plots the contents of the buffer and advances the paper position a single dot row, based on the vertical density of the current mode. A CR (if CR = CR + LF is configured) may also be used with the same result. b.

A form feed (hex 0C) used as the line terminator plots the data bytes and advances the paper position to the next TOF.

4.

Regardless of which line terminator code is sent, the emulation will default to the previously selected print mode unless further plot control codes are provided with the data.

209

Chapter 6 Plot Mode

Plotting the Data

P-Series Plot Mode plots the image from the horizontal bit pattern. Figure 11 duplicates the pattern shown in Figure 6 but is modified for Odd Dot Plot.

Eight dot rows are required, two characters per row, six columns per character.

DOT

ROW

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

1st

CHARACTER

ODD COLUMNS

1 3 5 7 9 11

2nd

CHARACTER

ODD COLUMNS

1 3 5 7 9 11

1st

CHARACTER

ASCII DECIMAL

\

*

|

*

|

\

*

|

42

73

92

42

73

92

42

73

2nd

CHARACTER

ASCII DECIMAL

@

A

@

@

A

@

@

A

65

64

64

65

64

65

64

64

Figure 11. Odd Dot Plot Pattern Plan

The following program uses the Odd Dot Plot control code to produce the image. The image is printed 25 times as shown in Figure 12. An entire dot row is plotted in one printing pass. Consequently, the first row of all 25 images is printed in one pass, followed by the second row, etc., until all rows have been printed.

10 LPRINT “Odd Dot Plot”

20 FOR I=1 TO 8

30 READ R1

40 READ R2

50 LPRINT CHR$(5);

60 FOR N=1 TO 25

70 LPRINT CHR$(R1);CHR$(R2);

80 NEXT N

90 LPRINT

100 NEXT I

110 DATA 42, 64, 73, 65, 92, 64, 42, 64, 73, 65, 92, 64, 42, 64, 73, 65

120 LPRINT

Figure 12. Sample Odd Dot Plot

210

Exiting from P-Series Plot Mode

Exiting from P-Series Plot Mode

When returning to the print mode from the P-Series Plot Mode, an extra line feed should be included in the data stream to maintain proper print line registration relative to the last line of plot graphics. If the extra line feed is not included, the first character line after the graphics data may be truncated, as shown in Figure 13.

plot data

@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR

A text line follows plot data, preceded by a single line terminator code. (Text characters may extend into the range of the previously printed plot line and appear truncated.)

Note plot data

@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR

A text line follows plot data, but is preceded by an additional line terminator or LF code. (Characters are printed at full-height.)

Figure 13. Truncated Character Line

Adding the additional line terminator will cause the text lines for the remainder of the document to be shifted down from the text lines above the plot dot rows plotted into the last character row.

211

Chapter 6 Combining Graphics and Text

Combining Graphics and Text

The LinePrinter Plus Emulation is capable of combining graphics and characters (text) on the same page in two ways:

• Use Bit Image graphics or P-Series Plot mode to produce characters as well as graphics

• A combination of text (not plot) and graphics can be mixed on the same page within all protocols.

Text and graphics can be mixed on the same line, however, only by using the

Bit Image graphics in the Epson FX or Proprinter XL protocols.

Any character or symbol can be created in the Plot mode or with Bit Image graphics simply by addressing and plotting the appropriate dot positions.

Either Bit Image or Plot mode graphics can be mixed with text within the page on a line by line basis. Each line of graphics data must include a graphics control code or the emulation will automatically default to the print mode.

Using Bit Image graphics, it is possible to use the print mode to produce text on one print pass followed by a print pass to produce graphics on the same line; however, text characters can be affected by the Bit Image data when combined on the same line.

The plot data byte dot patterns shown on page 213 that are referenced in the description of P-Series plot mode on page 208.

212

Plot Data Byte Dot Patterns

Plot Data Byte Dot Patterns

^ __

213

Chapter 6 Combining Graphics and Text

214

7

Vertical Page Formatting

Overview

Rapid vertical paper movement is called slewing. A vertical format unit (VFU) is a program you load into the printer that enables it to slew paper to preset locations on a page.

On your printer, LF commands and other commands that produce blank lines are accumulated and moved in one efficient paper motion. The VFUs are maintained for compatibility with earlier applications.

Following an introductory overview of how to plan a vertical page format, the following two methods of vertical formatting are described in this chapter:

Vertical tab table: The IBM Proprinter XL and the Epson FX emulations each contain a vertical tab table. It is a set of programmed vertical tabs.

Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU): Only the P-Series emulation provides the EVFU capability.

Planning a Vertical Page Format

Vertical page formatting with a VFU consists of four steps:

1.

Select the type of vertical format you want to use. This is covered in the next section.

2.

Design the form, determining the spacing and channel assignments for every line. Channel assignments are discussed in the VFU sections.

3.

Determine the programming sequence. The format of the sequence depends on the type of VFU you select and is discussed in each VFU section of this chapter.

4.

Send the programming sequence to the printer in the host data stream.

This loads the VFU program.

215

Chapter 7 Proprinter and Epson Vertical Tab Table

VFU Characteristics

Keep in mind the following information when programming and using a VFU:

Elongated Characters. You can use elongated (double high) characters in

VFU programs. The VFU automatically counts one line of elongated characters as two character lines.

VFU Not Loaded. If the VFU is not loaded, the printer performs a single line feed in response to VFU commands.

Paper Runaway Protection. If the VFU memory is loaded and a channel code is sent that was not previously loaded, the printer moves the paper a single line feed.

Line Spacing. The printer can use either 6 or 8 lines per inch (lpi) spacing.

These VFUs calculate the forms length by line density selected. The 6 and 8 lpi spacing may be mixed on the same form, but should be done carefully.

Form Feed. A form feed sent from the control panel or a command from the host moves the paper to the first channel 1, which is the top of form.

Vertical Tab. A VT command moves the paper to the next channel 12. If a channel 12 is not loaded, a line feed will occur.

Proprinter and Epson Vertical Tab Table

The IBM Proprinter XL and the Epson FX emulations each contain a vertical tab table. It is a set of programmed vertical tabs. Various lines of the form are assigned vertical tabs, which are then accessed by control code for rapid paper advancement to the tab position.

Two control codes are used for vertical tabbing: ESC B sets single channel vertical tabs, and VT executes a vertical tab. These codes are described in

Chapters 4 and 5, which cover the Proprinter and Epson emulations, respectively. The Epson emulation also has ESC / to select one of eight tab channels and ESC b to set the tabs in a particular channel.

Executing Vertical Tabs

The vertical tab execute code is VT (hex 0B). It prints the contents of the print buffer (if data are in the buffer) and causes paper movement to the next predefined vertical tab position. If a tab position is not defined, the paper is moved to the next line at the current line spacing. If a tab position is at the current line, the paper is moved to the next tab position. If no tab positions are defined between the current line and the end of the form, the paper moves to the next TOF.

216

Vertical Tab Positions

Vertical Tab Positions

Vertical tab positions are set by line number. A maximum of 16 vertical tab positions can be set on the form. A sample format is shown in Figure 14.

The first vertical tab is set at line 6 for part number data, a second tab is set at line 8 for part name data, and a third tab is set at line 14 for quantity data. The

ESC B code assigns the vertical tabs to the lines of the form. Once the tab positions are set, sending the vertical tab execute code (VT) causes the paper

(currently at the top-of-form position) to advance to the first tab position for

PART NUMBER data. Sending another VT moves the paper to the second tab position for PART NAME, followed by a third VT to access the third tab position for QUANTITY data.

Form Data

PART NUMBER

PART NAME

QUANTITY

Form Line Number

1

2

5

6

3

4

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Vertical Tabs

Top of Form

Tab 1

Tab 2

Tab 3

20

Figure 14. Example of Vertical Tab Positions

217

Chapter 7 P-Series EVFU (Electronic Vertical Format Unit)

P-Series EVFU (Electronic Vertical Format Unit)

The EVFU may be selected in P-Series protocol. The EVFU provides 14 channels to identify up to 192 lines depending on the paper instruction. The programming sequence is 1) start load code; 2) line identification code; and 3) end load code.

Start Load Code - Hex 1E

The start load code clears and initializes the EVFU memory for the memory load program. The start load code is hex 1E.

Channel Assignment

The EVFU memory has the capacity for 192-line forms. The first line identification code (channel code) in the memory load program defines the first line on the form; the second line identification code defines the second line on the form, etc. Each line must have a line identification code. Filler channel codes are used for lines that will not be accessed by the print program. Any channel code can be used as a filler except channel code 1, which is reserved for the top-of-form, and channel code 12, which is reserved as the vertical tab channel. The same filler channel code can be repeated as necessary for any number of lines.

Channel 1. The top-of-form code, reserved as the first line on the form or the first line printed (top-of-form position). The operating program sends the channel 1 code to advance to the top of the next form. After the memory is loaded, a Form Feed code (FF, hex 0C) will move the paper to the next channel 1 (top-of-form).

Channels 2 through 11, 13 and 14. Used as general channel codes (line identification codes) or filler channels. Each line on the form must be identified by a channel code. When the operating program sends the channel code, the paper advances to the line identified by the channel code. Lines not used by the operating program must be identified by filler channels (unused channel codes).

Channel 12. Reserved as the Vertical Tab channel. The Vertical Tab code

(VT, hex 0B) prints any data in the print buffer and rapidly slews the paper to the next line identified by the channel 12 code. If channel 12 is not loaded in the EVFU memory, a single line feed will be executed when a VT code is sent.

Channel 15 and 16. The codes for Channels 15 and 16 function as the Start

Load and End Load codes.

End Load - Hex 1F

The end load code terminates the memory load program. The end load code is hex 1F. Channel codes in excess of 192 channels received prior to the end load code are discarded.

218

Using the EVFU

Hex

1C

1D

1E

1F

18

19

1A

1B

14

15

16

17

10

11

12

13

ASCII

Dec.

28

29

30

31

24

25

26

27

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

Using the EVFU

Once the EVFU program has been enabled and loaded, sending the appropriate channel code to the printer will cause any data in the buffer to print and will position the paper to the next line on the form having the specified channel number assigned in EVFU memory.

For a data byte to be recognized as an EVFU instruction, the following criteria must be met:

• Data bit 5 must be 1 (set)

• Data bits 6-8 must be 0 (not set)

Given these conditions, the lower four bits of a byte will specify the EVFU channel number. Table 43 lists the EVFU channels and their equivalent data bytes.

Table 43. P-Series EVFU Codes

Data Bits

Code 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

DLE

DC1

DC2

DC3

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

CAN

EM

SUB

ESC

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

FS

GS

RS

US

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

(X = Undefined, 0, or 1) (1 = High) (0 = Low)

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

Channel

1

0 1 (TOF)

1 2

0 3

1 4

0 5

1 6

0 7

1 8

0 9

1 10

0 11

1 12 (VT)

0 13

1 14

0 Start Load

1 End Load

219

Chapter 7 P-Series EVFU (Electronic Vertical Format Unit)

Note The ESC code cannot be used simultaneously as the EVFU

VT code and the Special Function Control Code (SFCC).

Refer to the appropriate protocol chapter for more information on the SFCC.

Clearing the EVFU Memory

The following actions will reset (clear) the EVFU memory:

1.

Sending only the start load code.

2.

Sending a start load code followed immediately by an end load code.

3.

A second start load code is received, resulting in reinitialization of the

EVFU. (This allows the host data to be restarted.)

When the EVFU memory is cleared, the forms length returns to the previously set value and the current print position becomes the top-of-form (TOF).

220

A

Standard ASCII Character

Set

KEY

0

1

1

B7

BITS

B6

B5

B4 B3 B2 B1

0

0

1

1 0 1 1

1

0

0

1

ESC

33

27

1B

OCTAL

DECIMAL

HEX

ASCII CHARACTER

0

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

B4

B7

BITS

0

B6 0

B5

COLUMN

0

B3 B2 B1

ROW

0

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0

0

1

2

NUL

SOH

STX

1

1

1

0

0

0

2

2

2

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0

1 0 0 1

1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BEL

BS

HT

LF

VT

FF

CR

SO

SI

10

8

8

7

7

7

11

9

9

6

6

6

5

5

5

3

3

3

4

4

4

14

12

0 C

15

13

0 D

16

14

0 E

17

15

0 F

12

10

0 A

13

11

0 B

0

0

1

1

DLE

DC1

(XON)

DC2

DC3

(XOFF)

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

EM

SUB

ESC

FS

GS

RS

US

27

23

17

30

24

18

25

21

15

26

22

16

31

25

19

23

19

13

24

20

14

20

16

10

21

17

11

22

18

12

36

30

1E

37

31

1F

34

28

1C

35

29

1D

32

26

1A

33

27

1B

0

1

0

SP

!

"

#

$

%

&

(

)

+

-

/

*

.

,

2

47

39

27

50

40

28

45

37

25

46

38

26

51

41

29

43

35

23

44

36

24

40

32

20

41

33

21

42

34

22

54

44

2C

55

45

2D

56

46

2E

57

47

2F

52

42

2A

53

43

2B

@

4

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

107

71

47

110

72

48

105

69

45

106

70

46

111

73

49

103

67

43

104

68

44

100

64

40

101

65

41

102

66

42

114

76

4C

115

77

4D

116

78

4E

117

79

4F

112

74

4A

113

75

4B

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

\

[

]

^

_

5

127

87

57

130

88

58

125

85

55

126

86

56

131

89

59

123

83

53

124

84

54

120

80

50

121

81

51

122

82

52

134

92

5C

135

93

5D

136

94

5E

137

95

5F

132

90

5A

133

91

5B

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

:

;

<

=

>

?

3

67

55

37

70

56

38

65

53

35

66

54

36

71

57

39

63

51

33

64

52

34

60

48

30

61

49

31

62

50

32

74

60

3C

75

61

3D

76

62

3E

77

63

3F

72

58

3A

73

59

3B a b c d e f g h j i k l m n o

6 7 p q r s t u v w x y z

{

|

}

~

DEL

167

119

77

170

120

78

165

117

75

166

118

76

171

121

79

163

115

73

164

116

74

160

112

70

161

113

71

162

114

72

174

124

7C

175

125

7D

176

126

7E

177

127

7F

172

122

7A

173

123

7B

147

103

67

150

104

68

145

101

65

146

102

66

151

105

69

143

99

63

144

100

64

140

96

60

141

97

61

142

98

62

154

108

6C

155

109

6D

156

110

6E

157

111

6F

152

106

6A

153

107

6B

221

Appendix A

222

B

P-Series Emulation

Character Sets

Introduction

This appendix shows the character set charts (also referred to as code pages) for the P-Series emulation. The character sets are shown in Near Letter

Quality (NLQ). They may be selected using the configuration menus, described in detail in your User’s Guide . There are also several control codes that allow you to select different character sets, described in Chapter 3 of this book. These include “SFCC l”, “SFCC OSET”, “SFCC R” and “SFCC PSET”.

The maximum set of printable symbols is shown for columns hex 80-9F

(selected via the ESC 6 control code).

223

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

IBM PC, Primary Subset: ASCII (USA)

224

IBM PC, Primary Subset: French

225

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

IBM PC, Primary Subset: German

226

IBM PC, Primary Subset: English (UK)

227

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

IBM PC, Primary Subset: Danish

228

IBM PC, Primary Subset: Swedish

229

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

IBM PC, Primary Subset: Italian

230

IBM PC, Primary Subset: Spanish

231

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

IBM PC, Primary Subset: Japanese

232

IBM PC, Primary Subset: French Canadian

233

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

IBM PC, Primary Subset: Latin American

234

IBM PC, Primary Subset: Danish II

235

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

IBM PC, Primary Subset: Spanish II

236

IBM PC, Primary Subset: Latin American II

237

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

IBM PC, Extended Subset: 0437 PC Character Set

238

IBM PC, Extended Subset: 0850 PC Multilingual

239

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

Multinational, ASCII (USA)

240

Multinational, EBCDIC

241

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: ASCII (USA)

242

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: German

243

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Swedish

244

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Danish

245

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Norwegian

246

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Finnish

247

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: English (UK)

248

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Dutch

249

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: French

250

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Spanish

251

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Italian

252

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Turkish

253

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Japanese

254

ECMA Latin 1, Extended Subset: Multinational

255

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

ECMA Latin 1, Extended Subset: Barcode 10 cpi

256

ECMA Latin 1, Extended Subset: Greek

257

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

ECMA Latin 1, Extended Subset: Graphic

258

ECMA Latin 1, Extended Subset: Scientific 10 cpi

259

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

DEC Multinational, ASCII (USA)

260

DEC Multinational, French

261

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

DEC Multinational, German

262

DEC Multinational, English (UK)

263

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

DEC Multinational, Norwegian/Danish

264

DEC Multinational, Swedish

265

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

DEC Multinational, Italian

266

DEC Multinational, Spanish

267

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

DEC Multinational, Japanese

268

DEC Multinational, French Canadian

269

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

DEC Multinational, Dutch

270

DEC Multinational, Finnish

271

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

DEC Multinational, Swiss

272

OCR A

273

Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets

OCR B

274

C

Proprinter Emulation

Character Sets

Introduction

This appendix shows the character set charts (also referred to as code pages) for the Proprinter emulation. The character sets are shown in Near Letter

Quality (NLQ). They may be selected using the configuration menus, described in detail in your User’s Guide .

The maximum set of printable symbols is shown for columns hex 80-9F

(selected via the ESC 6 control code).

275

Appendix C Proprinter Emulation Character Sets

0437 PC Character Set

276

0850 PC Multilingual

277

Appendix C Proprinter Emulation Character Sets

OCR A

278

OCR B

279

Appendix C Proprinter Emulation Character Sets

280

D

Epson Emulation

Character Sets

Introduction

This appendix shows the character set charts (also referred to as code pages) for the Epson emulation. The character sets are shown in Near Letter Quality

(NLQ). They may be selected using the configuration menus, described in detail in your User’s Guide . The international character sets may be selected using the ESC R n control code (see page 167).

The maximum set of printable symbols is shown for columns hex 80-9F

(selected via the ESC I or ESC 6 control code).

281

Appendix D Epson Emulation Character Sets

0437 PC Character Set

282

0850 PC Multilingual

283

Appendix D Epson Emulation Character Sets

Epson Set, ASCII (USA)

284

Epson Set, French

285

Appendix D Epson Emulation Character Sets

Epson Set, German

286

Epson Set, English (UK)

287

Appendix D Epson Emulation Character Sets

Epson Set, Danish I

288

Epson Set, Swedish

289

Appendix D Epson Emulation Character Sets

Epson Set, Italian

290

Epson Set, Spanish I

291

Appendix D Epson Emulation Character Sets

Epson Set, Japanese

292

Epson Set, Norwegian

293

Appendix D Epson Emulation Character Sets

Epson Set, Danish II

294

Epson Set, Spanish II

295

Appendix D Epson Emulation Character Sets

Epson Set, Latin American I

296

Epson Set, French Canadian

297

Appendix D Epson Emulation Character Sets

Epson Set, Latin American II

298

OCR A

299

Appendix D Epson Emulation Character Sets

OCR B

300

Index

A

Adjustments loading Flash memory, 20 software upgrades, 20

ASCII Character Set, 221

Attribute Set and Reset Codes

P-Series, 82

Available symbol sets

Table, 48

B

Bar Code Types

Table, 34

Bar codes

PCL-II, 34

Bar Code, US POSTNET, 256X

US POSTNET Bar Code, 44

BEL (Bell)

Proprinter control code, 122

Binary data, printing

PCL-II, 72

Bit image density selection, 203

Bit image graphics bit pattern from ASCII character, 202 for Proprinter and Epson emulations, 201 sample program, 205

Bit image pattern procedure for designing, 203

Bit image programming format, 204

Bold

PCL-II, 71

BS (Backspace)

Proprinter control code, 122

C

CAN (Cancel)

Proprinter control code, 128

Carriage Control

Directives, 75

Carriage Return

Epson FX-1050, 166

Proprinter emulation, 128

Character density selection

PCL-II, 47

Character font selection

PCL-II, 50

Character overstrike

PCL-II, 53

Character Set

ASCII, 221

Character sets

Epson FX-1050 international overlays, 167

Proprinter III XL control codes, 118

P-Series international, 88

P-Series international overlays, 91

Character style selection

PCL-II, 53 clearing horizontal margins, PCL-II, 56

CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH, 24, 25

Code selection

Bar Code

Table, 34

Configuration report, printing

PCL-II, 71

Configuring

PCL-II, 29

301

Control code description format

Epson FX-1050, 160

Proprinter III XL, 116

P-Series emulation, 80

Control Code Header

P-Series, 81

Control codes

Table, 30

Control codes index

Epson FX-1050, 162

Proprinter emulation, 120

P-Series emulation, 83

Cursor control

PCL-II, 54

D dagger symbol non-standard Epson code, 158

DC2, ESC DC2 (Condensed Print Cancel)

Proprinter control code, 130

DC4, ESC DC4 (Double Wide Print Cancel)

Proprinter control code, 132

Default values

Epson FX-1050 emulation, 156

PCL-II, 28

Proprinter III XL emulation, 114

P-Series emulation, 78

Density selection for bit images, 203

DIAGNOSTICS PASSED, 24

Diskette storage of emulation configuration, 29

Display functions mode

PCL-II, 55

E

EAN13

Bar Code, width, 40

EAN8

Bar Code, width, 40 emulation switching, 28

Epson FX vertical tabs, 216

Epson FX-1050 emulation, 155 character sets, 159

302 configuring with control codes, 160 control code description format, 160 control codes, 162

Backspace (BS), 165

Bell (BEL), 165

Cancel Line (CAN), 165

Carriage Return (CR), 166

Character Pitch 10 CPI (ESC P), 166

Character Pitch 12 CPI (ESC M), 166

Character Pitch 15 CPI (ESC g), 166

Character Set Select

International Languages (ESC R), 167

Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 0 (ESC =),

168

Condensed Print Reset (DC2), 169

Condensed Print (SI, ESC SI), 168

Cut-Sheet/Paper Feed Control (ESC EM), 169

Define a Download Character (ESC &), 169

Delete Character (DEL), 169

Double High Print. Set/Reset (ESC w), 170

Double Strike (ESC G), 170

Double Strike, Cancel (ESC H), 171

Double Wide Print (ESC W), 171

Double Wide Print (1 Line), Cancel (DC4), 172

Double Wide Print, 1 Line (SO), 172

Emphasized Print (ESC E), 173

Emphasized Print, Cancel (ESC F), 173

Enable Printing Hex 00-1F and 80-9F (ESC I),

173

Form Feed (FF), 175

Graphics, double density double speed (ESC

Y), 177

Graphics, double density (ESC L), 176

Graphics, quadruple density (ESC Z), 178

Graphics, standard density (ESC K), 175

Half Speed Mode, On/Off (ESC s), 178

Horizontal Tab Execute (HT), 179

Horizontal Tab Set/Release (ESC D), 179

Initialize Printer (ESC @), 180

Italic Printing Cancel (ESC 5), 180

Italic Printing (ESC 4), 180

Line Feed n/216 Inch (ESC J), 181

Line Feed (LF), 181

Line Spacing n/216 Inch (ESC 3), 183

Line Spacing n/72 Inch (ESC A), 184

Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi) (ESC 2), 182

Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi) (ESC 0), 182

Line Spacing 7/72 Inch (ESC 1), 183

Make 80-9F Hex Printable (ESC 6), 184

Master Print Select (ESC !), 186

Paper Out Detection Disable (ESC 8), 187

Paper Out Detection Enable (ESC 9), 186

Pass Bit 7 from Host (ESC #), 187

Printer Deselect (DC3), 187

Printer Select (DC1), 187

Proportional Spacing, Select/Deselect (ESC p),

191

Reassign Graphics Mode (ESC ?), 188

Remove Downloaded Characters, 188

Select Graphics Mode (ESC *), 189

Select Italic Character Set (ESC t), 190

Select Print Quality (ESC x), 191

Select Serif or Sans Serif Font (ESC k), 192

Select User-Defined Font (ESC %), 192

Select Vertical Tab Channel (ESC /), 192

Select 9-Pin Graphics Mode (ESC ^), 190

Set Absolute Print Position in 1/60 Inch (ESC

$), 193

Set Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 1 (ESC >),

193

Set Forms Length by Lines (ESC C), 194

Set Forms Length in Inches (ESC C 0), 193

Set Intercharacter Spacing in 1/120 Inch (ESC

SP), 195

Set Margin, Left (ESC l), 195

Set Margin, Right (ESC Q), 195

Set Relative Horizontal Print Position in 1/120

Inch (ESC ), 196

Set Vertical Tabs in Channels (ESC b), 196

Skip Over Perforation (ESC N), 197

Skip Over Perforation, Cancel (ESC O), 197

Superscript and Subscript Printing (ESC S),

198

Superscript and Subscript Printing, Cancel

(ESC T), 198

Underline (ESC -), 199

Unidirectional Printing, Set/Reset (ESC U), 199

Unidirectional Printing, 1 Line (ESC, 199

Vertical Tab, Execute (VT), 200

Vertical Tab, Set/Clear (ESC B), 200

ESC (Escape) sequences, 160 exceptions, 158 factory settings, 156

Make 80-9F Hex Control Codes (ESC 7) control codes, 184

Set and Reset codes, 161

Epson FX-1050 Features, 20

ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 24

ERROR DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX, 24

ERROR EC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 24

ERROR EC STOPPED AT STATE XXXX, 24

ERROR FLASH NOT DETECTED, 24

ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED, 24

ERROR NVRAM FAILURE, 24

ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM, 24

ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH, 24

ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE, 24

ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID, 25

ERROR SECURITY PAL NOT DETECTED, 25

ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX, 25

ERROR WRITING TO FLASH, 24, 25

ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM, 25

ESC

(Character Pitch 12 cpi)

Proprinter control code, 129

ESC - (Underline)

Proprinter control code, 154

ESC A (Line Spacing n/72 Inch, Storage)

Proprinter control code, 142

ESC B (Tab Set/Clear, Vertical)

Proprinter control code, 153

ESC C (Forms Length Set in Lines)

Proprinter control code, 135

ESC C 0 (Forms Length Set in Inches)

Proprinter control code, 134

ESC D (Tab Set/Clear, Horizontal)

303

Proprinter control code, 151

ESC E (Emphasized Print)

Proprinter control code, 133

ESC F (Emphasized Print Cancel)

Proprinter control code, 133

ESC G (Bold Printing)

Proprinter control code, 127

ESC H (Bold Printing Cancel)

Proprinter control code, 127

ESC I (Print Mode)

Proprinter control code, 146

ESC J (Line Feed n/216 Inch, One Line Only)

Proprinter control code, 139

ESC K control code single density bit image graphics, 203

ESC K (Bit Image Mode, Single Density)

Proprinter control code, 123

ESC L control code double density bit image graphics, 204

ESC L (Bit Image Mode, Double Density, Half

Speed)

Proprinter control code, 124

ESC N (Margin, Bottom)

Proprinter control code, 144

ESC O (Margin Cancel, Bottom)

Proprinter control code, 144

ESC P (Proportional Spacing)

Proprinter control code, 147

ESC Q (Deselect Printer)

Proprinter control code, 131

ESC R (Tabs, Clear All)

Proprinter control code, 153

ESC S (Superscript/Subscript Printing)

Proprinter control code, 150

ESC T (Superscript/Subscript Printing, Cancel)

Proprinter control code, 150

ESC U (Unidirectional Printing)

Proprinter control code, 154

ESC W (Double Wide Print)

Proprinter control code, 131

ESC x (Print Quality)

Proprinter control code, 147

ESC Y control code double density bit image graphics, 204

ESC Y (Bit Image Mode, Double Density, Normal

Speed)

Proprinter control code, 125

ESC Z control code quadruple density bit image graphics, 204

ESC Z (Bit Image Mode, Quadruple Density)

Proprinter control code, 126

ESC (Print All Characters)

Proprinter control code, 145

ESC 0 (Line Spacing 1/8 Inch, 8 lpi)

Proprinter control code, 140

ESC 1 (Line Spacing 7/72 Inch, 10.3 lpi)

Proprinter control code, 140

ESC 2 (Line Spacing n/72 Inch, Executes)

Proprinter control code, 141

ESC 3 (Line Spacing n/216 inch)

Proprinter control code, 143

ESC 4 (Set Top-of-Form)

Proprinter control code, 149

ESC 5 (Carriage Return Set)

Proprinter control code, 129

ESC 6 (Character Set Select

Set 2(B))

Proprinter control code, 129

ESC 7 (Character Set Select

Set 1(A))

Proprinter control code, 129

ESC ^ (Print Next Character)

Proprinter control code, 146

ESC _ (Overscoring)

Proprinter control code, 145

Escape sequences

PCL-II, 31

Escape (ESC) control codes overview

IBM Proprinter III XL, 116

Escape (ESC) sequences

Epson FX-1050, 160

EVFU (Electronic Vertical Format Unit), 218

EVFU (Electronic Vertical Formatting Unit) channel assignment, 218

304

clearing the memory, 220 end load code, 218

P-Series, 218 start load code, 218 using the EVFU, 219

F

Factory settings

Epson FX-1050 emulation, 156

PCL-II, 28

Proprinter III XL emulation, 114

P-Series emulation, 78

Feature Access

Transparent Mode, 74

FF (Form Feed)

Proprinter control code, 134

Flash memory, loading, 20

Flash messages

CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH, 24, 25

DIAGNOSTICS PASSED, 24

ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 24

ERROR DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX, 24

ERROR EC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 24

ERROR EC STOPPED AT STATE XXXX, 24

ERROR FLASH NOT DETECTED, 24

ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED, 24

ERROR NVRAM FAILURE, 24

ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM, 24

ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH,

24

ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE, 24

ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID, 25

ERROR SECURITY PAL NOT DETECTED, 25

ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX, 25

ERROR WRITING TO FLASH, 24, 25

ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM, 25

LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX%, 25

RESETTING . . . / PLEASE WAIT, 25

RESTORING BOOT CODE, 25

SECURITY CODE VIOLATION, 25

SENDING PROGRAM TO EC PROCESSOR,

25

TABLE MISMATCH DOWNLOAD AGAIN, 25

Font selection

11.3 cpi, US Postnet, 44

G

General information

PCL-II, 30

Graphics, 75

Graphics and Text, Combining, 212

Graphics control codes overview

IBM Proprinter III XL, 117

Graphics Mode

8-Pin, 189

Graphics printing

Proprinter and Epson bit image graphics, 201

Graphics printing overview, 201

Graphics Resolution

Table, 69

H

Horizontal margin selection

PCL-II, 55

HP 1000 information

PCL-II, 76

HP 3000 information

PCL-II, 74

HT (Tab, Horizontal)

Proprinter control code, 151

I

IBM Proprinter III XL overview See Proprinter III XL emulation, 113

Ignored and reserved control codes

Proprinter III XL emulation, 118

Image printing overview, 201

Industrial 2 of 5

Bar Code, width, 39

Interleaved 2 of 5

Bar Code, width, 39

International character sets

Epson FX-1050, 167

Italic, character selection

PCL-II, 53

305

K

ESC, 136

Proprinter control codes

Initialize Parameters (ESC, 136

L

Labels, multiple

Printing, 37

Levels, compatible, PCL-II, 29

LF (Line Feed)

Proprinter control code, 138

Line spacing

PCL-II, 56

LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX%, 25

M

Manuals, related, 18

Margins, Horizontal (ESC X)

Proprinter control code, 144

Memory, Flash loading software, 20

Moving paper, VFC

PCL-II, 60

O

Odd dot plot pattern plan, 210

Odd Dot Plot Sample, 210

P

Paper slewing, 215

Parameter, escape sequence

PCL-II, 31

PCL-II, 27 default settings, 28 levels of compatibility, 29

Perforation skip mode, 75

PCL-II, 57

PI Line not used by Proprinter emulation, 116

Plot

Odd Dot Sample, 210

Truncated Character Line, 211

Plot density

306

P-Series emulation, 206

Plot mode data line format, 208 double density plot, 209 high density plot sample, 207 normal density plot, 209 normal density plot sample, 206 odd dot pattern plan, 210 plot data byte format, 207

Plot mode graphics

P-Series emulation, 206

Prefix, escape sequence

PCL-II, 31

Primary symbol set

PCL-II, 51

Print mode selection

PCL-II, 58

Print pitch selection

PCL-II, 58

Printing Bar Codes

Bar Codes, printing, 36

Printing hex values

Printer behavior

7-bit characters

8-bit characters, 58

Programmable reset

PCL-II, 60

Programmable VFC

PCL-II, 60

Proprinter control codes

Backspace (BS), 122

Bell (BEL), 122

Bit Image Mode, Double Density (Half Speed),

ESC L, 124

Bit Image Mode, Double Density, Normal

Speed (ESC Y), 125

Bit Image Mode, Quadruple Density (ESC Z),

126

Bit Image Mode, Single Density (ESC K), 123

Bold Printing Cancel (ESC H), 127

Bold Printing (ESC G), 127

Cancel (CAN), 128

Carriage Return Set (ESC 5), 129

Carriage Return (CR), 128

Character Pitch 12 cpi (ESC

), 129

Character Set Select

Set 1(A) (ESC 7), 129

Set 2(B) (ESC 6), 129

Condensed Print Cancel (DC2, ESC DC2), 130

Condensed Print (SI, ESC SI), 130

Deselect Printer (ESC Q), 131

Double Wide Print (ESC W), 131

Double Wide Print (One Line Only) Cancel

(DC4, ESC DC4), 132

Double Wide Print, One Line Only (SO), 132

Emphasized Print Cancel (ESC F), 133

Emphasized Print (ESC E), 133

Form Feed (FF), 134

Forms Length Set in Inches (ESC C 0), 134

Forms Length Set in Lines (ESC C), 135 grouped by function, 120

Line Feed n/216 Inch, One Line Only (ESC J),

139

Line Feed (LF), 138

Line Spacing n/216 Inch (ESC 3), 143

Line Spacing n/72 Inch, Executes (ESC 2), 141

Line Spacing n/72 Inch, Storage (ESC A), 142

Line Spacing 1/8 Inch, 8 lpi (ESC 0), 140

Line Spacing 7/72 Inch, 10.3 lpi (ESC 1), 140

Margin Cancel, Bottom (ESC O), 144

Margins, Horizontal (ESC X), 144

Margin, Bottom (ESC N), 144

Overscoring (ESC_), 145

Print All Characters (ESC ), 145

Print Mode (ESC I), 146

Print Next Character (ESC ^), 146

Print Quality (ESC x), 147

Proportional Spacing (ESC P), 147

Set Top-of-Form (ESC 4), 149

Superscript/Subscript Printing Cancel (ESC T),

150

Superscript/Subscript Printing (ESC S), 150

Tab Set/Clear, Horizontal (ESC D), 151

Tab Set/Clear, Vertical (ESC B), 153

Tabs, Clear All (ESC R), 153

Tab, Horizontal (HT), 151

Tab, Vertical (VT), 152

Underline (ESC -), 154

Proprinter III XL emulation character set control codes, 118 configuring via control codes and menus, 113 control code description format, 116

ESC (Escape) control codes overview, 116 factory settings, 114, 156 graphics control codes overview, 117 ignored and reserved control codes, 118 overview, 113 vertical tabs, 216

Proprinter III XL Features, 20

P-Series plot data byte format, 207 plot mode, 210

P-Series emulation, 77 configuring via control codes and menus, 27,

77 control code description format, 80 control codes, 83

Backspace (BS), 85

Bell (BEL), 85

Bold Print Reset (SFCC H), 86

Bold Print (SFCC G), 86

Carriage Return (CR), 87

Character Set Select

ECMA Latin 1 Extended (SFCC OSET), 90

International Languages (SFCC PSET, SFCC

R), 91

Character Set Select (SFCC 1), 88

Characters 80-9F, Control Codes (SFCC 7), 92

Characters 80-9F, Printable Symbols (SFCC

6), 92

Elongated (Double High) Print, Set/Reset

(SFCC w), 94

Elongated (Double High) Print, 1 Line Only

(SFCC h, BS), 93

Emphasized Print Reset (SFCC F), 95

307

Emphasized Print (SFCC E), 94

Emulation Reset (SFCC @), 95

Expanded Print, Double Wide (SFCC W), 96

Expanded Print, Double Wide 1 LIne Only

(SFCC k), 96

Extended Character Set Cancel (SI, SFCC SI),

97

Extended Character Set (S0, SFCC SO), 97

Form Feed (FF), 98

Forms Length Set in Inches (SFCC INCHES),

99

Forms Length Set in Lines (SFCC LINES), 99

Line Feed (LF), 100

Line Spacing n/216 Inch (SFCC 3), 104

Line Spacing n/72 Inch (SFCC A), 103

Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (SFCC A), 100

Line Spacing 1/8 Inch, 8 lpi (SFCC LPI), 101

Line Spacing 7/72 Inch (SFCC 1), 102

Line Spacing 8 or 10.3 lpi, 1 line only (ACK),

101

Overscoring (SFCC_), 104

Plot, Even Dot, P-Series High Density Graphics

(EOT), 105

Plot, Odd Dot, P-Series Normal Density

Graphics (ENQ), 105

Print Mode/Pitch Selection (SFCC PMODE),

106

Superscript/Subscript Printing Reset (SFCC T),

110

Superscript/Subscript Printing (SFCC S), 110

Underline (SFCC), 111

Vertical Tab (VT), 111

VFU Commands, 111 extended and multinational character sets, 88 factory settings, 28, 78 high density plot sample, 207 normal density plot sample, 206 plot density, 206 plot mode graphics, 206

P-Series EVFU, 218, 219 channel assignment, 218 clearing the memory, 220 end load code, 218 start load code, 218

P-Series Features, 19

P-Series Plot Mode

How to Exit, 211

P-Series plot mode data byte format sample, 208

PTX Linefeed, 59

R

Raster graphics

PCL-II, 69 reseting, PCL-II, 60

RESETTING . . . / PLEASE WAIT, 25

RESTORING BOOT CODE, 25

Royal Mail barcode, 40

S

Save Custom Sets menu option, 29

SECURITY CODE VIOLATION, 25 selecting fonts, attributes, 50

Self-test

PCL-II, 71

SENDING PROGRAM TO EC PROCESSOR, 25

Serial Interface, 74

Set and Reset Codes

Epson FX-1050 emulation, 161

SFCC

P-Series, 81

SFCC 1 (Character Set Select)

P-Series control code, 88

SI, ESC SI (Condensed Print)

Proprinter control code, 130

SO (Double Wide Print, One Line Only)

Proprinter control code, 132

Software loading into Flash memory, 20

Standard

PCL-II, 71

Storage of emulation configuration on diskette, 29

Stroke Weight

PCL-II, 71

Switching character font

308

PCL-II, 71 switching emulations, 28

Symbol set selection

PCL-II, 51

Table, 51

T

TABLE MISMATCH DOWNLOAD AGAIN, 25

Tabs, vertical

Epson FX, 216

Proprinter III XL emulation, 216

Terminator, escape sequence

PCL-II, 31

Text length selection

PCL-II, 56, 72

Throughput increased, VFC

PCL-II, 73

Transparent print data

PCL-II, 72

Truncated Character Line, 211

U

UCC/EAN-128

Bar Code, 40

Underlining

PCL-II, 72

Unidirectional Printing (ESC U)

Proprinter control code, 154

UPCA

Bar Code, width, 39

UPCE

Bar Code, width, 39

Upgrading software, 20

Upright, character selection

PCL-II, 53

US Postnet printing check digits, 43

US Postnet bar code

4.0 cpi, 46

V

Vertical format unit (VFU), 215

Vertical format units (VFUs) general programming information, 215

Vertical formatting

P-Series EVFU, 218

Vertical forms control

PCL-II, 73

Vertical page format planning, 215

Vertical tabbing example, 217

Vertical tabs

Epson FX, 216

Proprinter III XL emulation, 216

VFC Channel Definitions

Table, 73

VFU characteristics, 216

VT (Tab, Vertical)

Proprinter control code, 152

Z

11.3 CPI US Postnet Bar Code, 44

309

310

Copyright© 2000

Hewlett-Packard Company

Manual Part Number

171249-001PX

171249-001A

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents